Sharp DVR DV HR300H User Manual
DVD RECORDER  
WITH HARD DISC  
MDOVDEL-HR350H  
DV-HR300H  
OPERATION MANUAL  
• The region number  
for this recorder is 2  
2
If you require any advice or assistance regarding your  
Sharp product, please visit our web-site  
www.sharp.co.uk/customersupport. Customers  
without Internet access may telephone 08705 274277  
during office hours(or (01) 6760648 if telephoning  
from Ireland).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAFETY INFORMATION  
Power Cord Protection  
Note:  
To avoid any malfunctions of the Recorder, and to  
This Recorder can be used only where the power  
supply is AC 220V-240V, 50Hz. It cannot be used  
elsewhere.  
protect against electric shock, fire or personal injury,  
please observe the following.  
• Hold the plug firmly when connecting or  
disconnecting the AC power cord.  
• Keep the AC power cord away from heating  
appliances.  
CAUTION:  
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR  
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER  
THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT  
IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.  
• Never put any heavy object on the AC power cord.  
• Do not attempt to repair or reconstruct the AC power  
cord in any way.  
• This Player is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER  
product.  
AS THE LASER BEAM USED IN THIS RECORDER  
IS HARMFUL TO THE EYES, DO NOT ATTEMPT  
TO DISASSEMBLE THE CABINET. REFER  
• The CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT label is located on  
the rear cover.  
• This product contains a low power laser device. To  
ensure continued safety do not remove any cover or  
attempt to gain access to the inside of the product.  
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.  
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY.  
WARNING:  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS EQUIPMENT TO  
RAIN OR MOISTURE.  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, AND ANNOYING INTERFERENCE, USE  
THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES ONLY.  
Laser Diode Properties  
Material: DVD: AlGaInP  
CD: GaAlAs  
Wave length: DVD: 658nm  
CD: 784nm  
Emission Duration: Pulse  
Laser output: Max. DVD: 100mW  
CD: 255mW  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
SAFETY INFORMATION ..............................  
Features .......................................................  
Accessories .................................................  
Precautions about Using This Product.....  
3
6
7
8
Channel Setting ........................................... 28  
Channel Setting ............................................................. 28  
Channel Sort .................................................................. 28  
Deleting Channels .......................................................... 29  
Re-naming Channels ..................................................... 29  
Post Code .................................................... 30  
Post Code Security ........................................................ 30  
Changing PIN NUMBER ................................................ 30  
About Hard Disc (HDD) ............................... 10  
Recording Format .......................................................... 10  
Unrecordable Material.................................................... 10  
Hard Disc Operation (Recording/Playback/Time Shift  
Recording) ................................................................... 10  
Initialization .................................................................... 10  
CPRM (control) Information ........................................... 10  
Display Information..................................... 31  
Content of TV Screen Display ........................................ 31  
Checking the Channel, Remaining Time of HDD and  
Number of Titles .......................................................... 31  
Checking the Channel, Remaining Time of DVD and  
Number of Titles .......................................................... 32  
Switching Front Panel Display ....................................... 32  
About DVD ................................................... 11  
Types of Discs that Can Be Used with This Recorder ... 11  
Discs that Cannot Be Used with This Recorder ............. 11  
Types of Discs for Recording ......................................... 12  
Recording Formats ........................................................ 13  
Recording Time .............................................................. 13  
Disc Remaining Time ..................................................... 13  
Using the Proper Disc .................................................... 14  
Unrecordable Material.................................................... 14  
Preparation to Operate This Recorder ...... 33  
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback ...... 34  
Time Shift Viewing ......................................................... 35  
Chasing Playback .......................................................... 35  
Recording to HDD ....................................... 36  
Direct Recording to HDD ............................................... 37  
Setting the Record End Time during Direct Recording  
(Simple Recording Timer) ............................................ 37  
Initialization and Finalization ..................... 15  
Initialization (Formatting)................................................ 15  
Allowing Discs to Be Played Back  
Recording to DVD ....................................... 38  
Loading Disc .................................................................. 38  
Direct Recording to DVD................................................ 38  
with Other DVD Players (Finalization) ......................... 15  
About the Contents of the Disc ................. 15  
Title, Chapter and Track ................................................. 15  
Icons Used on DVD Video Disc Case ............................ 16  
The Icons Used in This Operation Manual ..................... 16  
Setting Recording Mode (HDD/DVD) ......... 40  
HDD Recording Mode and Recording Time................... 40  
DVD-RW/R Recording Mode and Recording Time ........ 40  
Setting the Manual Recording Mode (MN)..................... 41  
Direct Recording the TV programme you are watching . 41  
Important Information ................................. 17  
Disc Precautions ............................................................ 17  
Copyright........................................................................ 17  
Cautions Regarding Recording ...................................... 17  
Timer Recording.......................................... 42  
Timer Recording with VIDEO Plus+® system ................. 42  
Timer Recording by Specifying Date,  
Time and Channel ....................................................... 44  
Confirm, Change and Cancel a Timer Programme ........ 46  
Major Components...................................... 18  
Main Unit (Front) ............................................................ 18  
Front Panel Display........................................................ 18  
Main Unit (Rear)............................................................. 18  
Remote Control Unit ...................................................... 19  
Loading the Batteries ..................................................... 20  
Operating a TV Using the Remote Control (Universal  
Dubbing (HDD/DVD) .................................... 47  
Dubbing Method and Dubbing Types ............................. 47  
Limitation during Dubbing .............................................. 47  
Dubbing (HDD↔DVD)/High Speed Dubbing  
Remote Control) .......................................................... 21  
Setting the Remote Control Code .................................. 21  
(HDD¡DVD) ................................................................ 49  
Basic Connection........................................ 22  
Connection Using Antenna Cables and SCART Cables .. 22  
Using Other Types of Video Output ............................... 23  
Eliminating Problems (Recording, Timer  
Recording, Dubbing) ............................ 51  
HDD Playback.............................................. 53  
Playback ........................................................................ 53  
Playback from REC LIST ............................................... 54  
Playback by Selecting Title Number (Direct Playback) .. 55  
Other Types of Playback ................................................ 56  
Auto Installation ............................................. 24  
Turning the Power On .................................................... 24  
Using the AUTO INSTALLATION for initial setting ......... 24  
About START MENU ................................... 26  
About START MENU...................................................... 26  
Basic START MENU Operation ..................................... 26  
DVD/CD Playback ........................................ 58  
Loading Disc .................................................................. 58  
DVD-RW/R Playback ..................................................... 58  
DVD Video Playback ...................................................... 59  
Audio CD/Video CD Playback ........................................ 59  
Other Types of Playback ................................................ 60  
Playback by Selecting with the Menu in the DVD .......... 62  
Clock Setting ............................................... 27  
Clock Setting .................................................................. 27  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
MP3 File Playback ....................................... 63  
To Play Another File (music title) during Playback ......... 63  
To Skip the File during Playback .................................... 63  
Function Setting .......................................... 87  
Functions under OTHER SETTINGS 1.......................... 87  
REC. FUNCTION ........................................................... 87  
Basic Operation for REC. FUNCTION Setting ............... 88  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ................................................... 89  
Basic Operation for VIEW/PLAY SETTING.................... 90  
ADJUSTMENT ............................................................... 91  
Basic Operation for ADJUSTMENT Setting ................... 94  
Functions under OTHER SETTINGS 2.......................... 95  
MODE SETTING ............................................................ 95  
Basic Operation for MODE SETTING ............................ 96  
MANUAL TUNING ......................................................... 97  
CHANNEL SORT ........................................................... 97  
CLOCK SETTING .......................................................... 98  
POST CODE .................................................................. 98  
Initialization .................................................................... 99  
Finalization ..................................................................... 99  
INITIALIZE ..................................................................... 99  
FINALIZE ....................................................................... 99  
Basic Operation for INITIALIZE/FINALIZE..................... 100  
Settings During Playback ........................... 64  
Function Control............................................................. 64  
Simultaneous Recording/Playback  
Function ................................................. 66  
Viewing the Programme Being Recorded from the  
Beginning while Recording to HDD  
(Chasing Playback) ..................................................... 66  
DVD/CD Playback during HDD Recording (Simultaneous  
Recording/Playback) ................................................... 66  
Playing Back a Title on the HDD during DVD Recording  
(Simultaneous Recording/Playback) ........................... 66  
Viewing Another Programme Recorded on HDD while  
Recording to HDD (Simultaneous Recording/  
Playback) ..................................................................... 66  
Function Menu............................................. 67  
Troubleshooting ..........................................101  
On-screen Error Messages ........................104  
Glossary.......................................................107  
Specifications.............................................. 110  
How to Use the FUNCTION MENU ............................... 67  
Editing (HDD/DVD) ...................................... 68  
About Editing.................................................................. 68  
Editing Procedure .......................................................... 68  
Switching between Original and Play List (Play Lists can  
be created only for HDD or VR mode) ........................ 69  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD) .......... 70  
Erasing Unnecessary Scenes from an Original Title  
(ERASE SCENE)......................................................... 70  
Inputting/Changing Title Name  
(CHANGE TITLE NAME)............................................. 72  
Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) ............. 73  
Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER)............. 74  
Combining Chapters Together  
(COMBINE CHAPTERS) ............................................. 75  
Disabling Title Edit and Erase (TITLE PROTECT)......... 75  
Erasing All Titles............................................................. 76  
Erasing by Selecting a Title (or Chapter) ....................... 76  
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD) ................... 77  
Creating a Play List ........................................................ 77  
Adding a Scene from an Original to a Play List  
(ADD SCENE) ............................................................. 78  
Changing the Title Sequence (MOVE TITLE) ................ 80  
Erasing Unnecessary Scenes (ERASE SCENE) ........... 81  
Inputting/Changing Title Name  
(CHANGE TITLE NAME)............................................. 81  
Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) ............. 81  
Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER)............. 81  
Combining Chapters Together  
(COMBINE CHAPTERS) ............................................. 81  
Enjoying High Quality Sounds................... 82  
Playing 2 Channel Audio with an Analogue  
Connection .................................................................. 82  
Playing Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG Audio with a  
Digital Connection ....................................................... 82  
Playing 2 Channel Audio with a Digital Connection ....... 83  
Recording from External Equipment......... 84  
Recording from a Digital Camcorder Using i.LINK......... 84  
Recording from a Camcorder (VCR) Using an  
Analogue Connection .................................................. 86  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
DVD-RW/R recording/playback  
“Time Shift Viewing”, “Chasing  
Playback” and “Simultaneous  
Recording/Playback” —functions  
you can only get with a hard disc  
1
4
with outstanding compatibility  
• This Recorder is compatible with digital recording  
on rewritable DVD-RW discs and one-time record-  
able DVD-R discs. It has two recording formats:  
“VR (Video Recording) mode” which has a wealth of  
editing functions, and “Video mode” which can be  
played back with existing DVD players. This lets  
you enjoy recording and dubbing to suit your  
purpose.  
1Time shift viewing  
While you are watching a programme, the phone  
rings.… At times like this, you can pause the  
programme being broadcast at the press of a  
button, and then watch the rest of the programme  
at your leisure after you finish your phone call. You  
can also switch to the current broadcast scene just  
by pressing ISTOP/LIVE button.  
High picture quality design (Used  
in all hard disc and DVD modes)  
2
2Chasing playback  
VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recording  
You return home earlier than expected while timer  
recording is in progress…. At times like this, you  
don’t have to wait for recording to end. You can  
immediately view the programme from the begin-  
ning.  
• Constantly maintains optimal high picture quality by  
varying the bit rate (amount of video data) for each  
scene depending on the video content (e.g.  
whether movement is fast or slow).  
3Simultaneous recording/playback  
Even while recording to the hard disc, you can  
enjoy playback of a DVD, or programmes already  
recorded on hard disc. You don’t have to wait for  
recording to finish.  
A variety of hard disc t DVD  
3
dubbing functions  
1High speed dubbing*1  
Enables high speed dubbing from hard disc to DVD  
so you can enjoy creating your own video library.  
For high speed dubbing, use discs conforming to DVD-RW  
Ver. 1.1/2g or DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4g.  
Comprehensive editing functions  
5
*1  
(Only titles recorded on the hard disc or in VR  
mode on DVD-RW can be edited.)  
2Rate conversion dubbing  
1Play list edit  
The mode can be selected from 32 levels just like  
recording mode. This enables recording at the  
optimal picture quality, given the remaining empty  
space on the disc.  
This lets you gather only the needed parts (i.e. a  
“Play List”) from a recorded original video (title).  
You can rearrange scenes and combine them with  
other scenes, or rearrange titles. This is convenient  
when you want to dub and save only the necessary  
scenes and titles.  
3Exact dubbing  
This automatically adjusts to the optimal record  
mode so that the material is dubbed exactly into the  
remaining area on the disc.  
2Chapter edit  
This lets you divide a title into chapter units during  
recording/playback or using the edit screen. After  
dividing, a list of recordings (thumbnails) can be  
displayed in chapter units, so you can copy, erase  
or dub to the play list in chapter units.  
3Erase scene  
This lets you erase unnecessary scenes. This is  
convenient when you want to cut out the commer-  
cials in a recorded programme before dubbing.  
4Batch erasing of titles/chapters  
Titles and chapters which become unnecessary  
after editing can be batch erased by selecting them  
from the list of recordings (thumbnails).  
5Edit undo function*2  
The time normally required for a programme of an hour  
on High Speed Dubbing to a double speed compatible  
disc  
Time Required  
Approx. 30 min  
Approx. 15 min  
Recording Mode  
Speed  
Approx. 2g  
Approx. 4g  
FINE  
SP  
LP  
Approx. 8g  
Approx. 7.5 min  
Approx. 5 min  
Approx. 12g  
EP  
If you mistakenly erase data during editing, this  
function lets you restore it to its immediately  
preceding state, just like “Undo” on a PC, so you  
can edit worry-free.  
*2 Edit undo can only be used once. It only works when  
“UNDO” is assigned to a coloured button (green) dis-  
played on the screen.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Simple operation and user-friendly  
design using a new remote control  
VIDEO Plus+*3 system  
6
9
• The PlusCode system allows you to programme  
your Recorder for timer recording simply by input-  
ting the PlusCode Programming number. The  
PlusCode numbers are listed in most newspapers,  
television guides, and local CATV listings. Simply by  
inputting this PlusCode number, you can  
programme your Recorder for timer recording,  
eliminating the need to input programme start time,  
stop time, channel, date and other information  
which is necessary for ordinary timer programming.  
1START MENU  
Press START MENU button on the remote control,  
and display the list of main functions on the screen.  
After that, you can operate by using the Cursor  
buttons and SET/ENTER button on the remote  
control, so this Recorder can be used easily even  
by a person who is unfamiliar with operation.  
2Coloured buttons  
The remote control has coloured buttons with four  
different colours. Functions are displayed in four  
different colours on the screen, and the Recorder  
can be operated by directly designating these  
functions.  
*3 VIDEO PLUS+ and PlusCode are registered trademarks  
of Gemstar Development Corporation. The VIDEO PLUS+  
system is manufactured under license from Gemstar  
Development Corporation.  
3Luminous buttons  
Luminous buttons are used for key control buttons  
on the remote control so they are easy to see in the  
dark.  
Digital connection (i.LINK) with a  
digital video/audio source equip-  
ment  
7
• The DV IN terminal allows you to capture, edit and  
store material from a digital camcorder equipped  
with a DV terminal.  
MP3 file playback  
8
• This Recorder allows you to playback MP3 files  
recorded on CD-RW/R.  
Accessories  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Two R-03 size batteries  
(“AAA” size, UM/SUM-4)  
for the remote control unit  
Remote control unit  
Video/audio cable  
Round coaxial cable  
Quick Start Guide  
Quick Start Guide  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions about Using This Product  
Do not use at locations at high  
temperature.  
Do not place objects on the Re-  
corder.  
• If you leave this equipment at a location which rises to an  
abnormally high temperature (like the inside of a car with  
the windows shut), this may cause deformation of the  
cabinet or malfunction. Be very careful not to allow the  
area abound the Recorder or discs to reach a high  
temperature.  
• Do not place any objects, such as vases or lighted  
candles on the top of the Recorder.  
• Set up at a location where there is adequate space above  
the Recorder  
• Do not place a TV or other heavy object on the Recorder.  
Doing so may result in problems like noise appearing on  
the screen, or deformation of the cabinet.  
Keep away from magnetic ob-  
• Do not place the Recorder on any equipment which gets  
hot.  
• Do not place at a location which is exposed to direct  
sunlight, or near a heater. Be careful because doing so  
will have an adverse effect on the cabinet and compo-  
nents.  
jects.  
• Keep the Recorder away from strong magnetic objects.  
Handle the Recorder carefully.  
• Do not drop the Recorder, or subject it to strong impact or  
vibration. Doing so will cause malfunction. Be careful  
when carrying or moving the Recorder.  
No fingers or other objects inside  
• Do not put any foreign object on the disc tray.  
When moving or shipping the  
Recorder  
• Remove the disc before wrapping the Recorder. In case  
you will not be using the Recorder for a while, remove the  
disc, and turn off the power.  
Do not remove the cabinets.  
• Do not remove the Recorder cabinets. Touching parts  
inside the cabinet could result in electric shock and/or  
damage to the Recorder. For service and adjustment  
inside the cabinet, please contact the nearest service  
centre approved by Sharp.  
Dew formation  
• Dew may form on the surface of and inside the Recorder  
if you suddenly carry it from a cold location to a warm  
location, or use it in a cold room where heating has just  
been turned on (i.e. on a winter morning). If dew forms,  
let the Recorder sit with the power off until the dew  
disappears. Using the Recorder with dew formation  
present may cause malfunction.(See page 17.)  
Do not cover the fan or ventila-  
tion holes on the back of the Re-  
corder.  
• When setting up the Recorder, do not cover the fan or  
ventilation holes on the rear of the Recorder. This will  
interfere with the cooling fan and cause malfunction. Be  
especially careful of this point when housing the Recorder  
in a TV stand or AV rack.  
• Do not use the Recorder on carpets, or on a bed or sofa,  
or wrap the Recorder in cloth or other material. This will  
interfere with the cooling fan and cause malfunction.  
Avoid dust and smoke.  
• Do not place the Recorder at a location which is unstable,  
subject to heavy vibration or where there is a lot of dust or  
tobacco smoke. Doing so may cause malfunction or  
accidents.  
Set up the Recorder so it is hori-  
zontal.  
• Do not stand the Recorder up vertically or place it upside  
down. Doing so will cause malfunction.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions about Using This Product  
• In the unlikely event that the hard disc (HDD) malfunc-  
tions for some reason, you cannot replace it by yourself. If  
you disassemble the Recorder you will void the warranty.  
Please contact the nearest service centre approved by  
Sharp. We cannot provide compensation for data content  
if data is lost or not recorded.  
Upkeep of cabinet  
• The cabinet surface employs a lot of plastic. Do not wipe  
these surfaces with benzene or thinner because this may  
cause deterioration or paint peeling.  
Connected equipment  
• Read carefully the “Precautions for Use” in the operation  
manual for any equipment connected to the Recorder.  
Power conservation  
• When you are finished using the Recorder, conserve  
power by turning power off. If you go on a trip, or  
otherwise will not use the Recorder for a long time,  
unplug the power cord from the AC outlet to ensure  
safety.  
• Do not apply volatile liquids like insecticide to the  
cabinet. Also, do not allow long-term contact with  
materials like rubber, vinyl products or synthetic leather.  
Doing so may cause problems like paint peeling.  
• Do not affix stickers or tape to the Recorder. Doing so  
may cause cabinet discolouration or damage.  
• If the cabinet or front panel display gets dirty, gently wipe  
it off with soft cloth like flannel. If it is extremely dirty, soak  
a cloth in neutral detergent diluted with water, wring the  
cloth well, wipe, and then wipe again with a dry cloth.  
Using powerful cleaners may cause discolouration,  
deterioration or paint peeling. We recommend testing any  
cleaners at an inconspicuous location on the Recorder.  
Requests regarding setup  
• Do not cover the fan or ventilation holes on the back of  
the Recorder. Doing so will interfere with heat radiation  
and cause malfunction.  
Notes about use  
• The Recorder and cabinet may become a little hot,  
depending on the use environment when using this  
Recorder. This is not a malfunction.  
Electromagnetic interference  
• When unplugging the power cord (to move the Recorder,  
etc.), first turn off power (STANDBY indicator on the front  
of the Recorder lights up red) to protect the hard disc  
(HDD).  
• When power is turned on, the fan will rotate to cool the  
Recorder.  
• Immediately after plugging the power cord into an AC  
outlet, or after recovery from a power failure, the unit may  
fail to operate for more than ten seconds because the  
Recorder is performing system adjustment.  
• If you use a mobile phone or other electronic equipment  
near the Recorder, video may be disturbed or become  
noisy during playback or recording due to electromag-  
netic interference.  
Antenna  
• To avoid the effects of radio interference, set up the  
antenna at a location away from busy roads, electric  
wires for train, electric transmission lines and neon signs.  
This is effective for preventing electric shock accidents in  
the unlikely event that antenna falls down.  
Notes about this operation  
manual  
• Do not make the antenna line unnecessarily long, or  
bundle it. Be careful because doing so will cause the  
picture to be unstable.  
• The antenna is exposed to the weather, so be careful to  
periodically check and replace it. This will ensure a  
beautiful picture. Antennas are particularly susceptible to  
damage at locations with heavy smoke and soot, and  
locations exposed to sea breeze.  
• In this operation manual, the terms “the Recorder”, “this  
Recorder” or “your Recorder” refer to the “DV-HR350H/  
DV-HR300H DVD Recorder with Hard Disc”.  
• The screen displays and Recorder illustrations given in  
this operation manual are for explanatory purposes, and  
may differ somewhat from the actual screen and Re-  
corder.  
Hard disc (HDD)  
• This Recorder records programmes onto a hard disc  
(HDD). The hard disc is equipped with a safety mecha-  
nism to protect data from impact, vibration and dust.  
However, to prevent loss of recorded data, you should be  
particularly careful of the following points:  
• Do not subject the Recorder to any impact.  
• Do not use at a location which is unstable or subject to  
vibration.  
• Do not move the Recorder while the power is on.  
• Do not unplug the power cord from the AC outlet  
during recording or playback. First turn power “OFF”,  
and then unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.  
• Do not use at a location with abrupt temperature  
variation (variation of more than 10°C per hour).  
• The Recorder will malfunction if used at a cold location  
(5°C or less) or an extremely hot location (35°C or  
higher).  
• If you carry the Recorder from a cold location to a  
warm location, let the Recorder sit for a while before  
using it.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About Hard Disc (HDD)  
This Recorder has a built in hard disc (abbreviated  
“HDD”) for recording and playback. Beware of the  
following points when setting up and using the Recorder.  
Failure to observe precautions may cause damage to  
the HDD itself or its content, failure of the disc to  
operate, or recording of noise.  
In the unlikely event that there is some problem like loss  
of recorded video or audio content due to a HDD  
malfunction, please be aware beforehand that Sharp will  
bear no responsibility to compensate for the content  
which could not be recorded or edited, for the loss of  
recorded or edited video, or for other related direct or  
indirect damages.  
• Do not subject to any vibration or impact.  
• Do not place at a cramped location which might block the  
cooling fan or ventilation port on the back of the Re-  
corder.  
• Do not place at a location with severe temperature  
variation.  
I If a power failure occurs  
• The content being recorded or timer recorded will be  
damaged if power failure occurs.  
• The content being played back may be damaged.  
I For important recording  
• If the HDD malfunctions, the content recorded on the  
HDD may be lost. If you wish to save content perma-  
nently, we recommend copying or moving the content  
to DVD-RW or DVD-R.  
s If the Recorder is set up at a location with severe  
temperature variation, dew may form on and inside the  
Recorder. If the Recorder is used with internal dew  
formation present, this may cause HDD damage or  
malfunction. We recommend keeping variation in room  
temperature within 10˚C per hour.  
NOTE  
• If a message indicating a HDD error is displayed (such as  
“CANNOT OPERATE DUE TO HDD ERROR.”) and the  
HDD has malfunctioned, you cannot replace the HDD by  
yourself. If you disassemble the Recorder, the warranty  
will become void. Also, recovery of data is impossible. If  
playback is possible, re-record the recorded content onto  
a DVD-RW/R disc, and contact your nearest service  
centre approved by Sharp.  
• Do not place at a location with high humidity.  
• Place the Recorder horizontally, never at an incline.  
• When the power is on, do not unplug the power cord from  
the AC outlet, turn off the breaker for the area where the  
Recorder is set up, or move the Recorder.  
s When moving the Recorder, first turn off the power and  
then unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.  
Recording Format  
I HDD recording is done using the variable bit rate  
format for more efficient recording.  
The following phenomena may occur.  
With the variable bit rate format, the remaining amount  
which can be recorded may increase or decrease relative  
to the display of the remaining amount of HDD space.  
• When the display indicates that the remaining amount of  
HDD space is low, first delete unnecessary programmes,  
and then record with an extra margin in the amount of  
remaining space.  
• Even if you delete a programme, the remaining amount  
may not increase by the amount of deleted time. When  
recording new video, record with an extra margin in the  
amount of remaining space.  
Hard Disc Operation  
(Recording / Playback / Time Shift  
Recording)  
• If the Recorder is used in a cold location (a location at  
low temperature), the drive will only allow live viewing  
after power is turned on until the HDD is ready. During  
this time, the Recorder will not allow Time Shift Viewing,  
recording, display of recording lists or playback of  
recorded programmes. Please wait until the HDD is  
ready.  
Initialization  
• Initialization erases all video recorded on the HDD. Be  
sure to dub important recordings onto DVD-RW/R discs  
before initializing.  
• With this Recorder, part of the HDD capacity is used as a  
system management area.  
Unrecordable Material  
• This Recorder is equipped with a copy guard function  
that prevents recording of video software or broadcast  
programmes that contain a signal that restricts copying in  
accordance with copyrights and so forth.  
• In the case a copy guard signal is contained in a source  
video that occurs partway through recording, recording is  
paused at that point. Recording resumes when the copy  
guard signal is no longer present, while no recordings will  
be made for the part where the copy prevention signal is  
present.  
CPRM (control) Information  
• There are 3 types of copy control signals: “Copy Freely”,  
“Copy Once” and “Copy Never”.  
“Copy Never” programmes cannot be recorded on HDD.  
When a “Copy Once” enabled programme is copied from  
HDD to DVD-RW, the video is not copied — it is moved  
from the HDD to the DVD-RW (i.e. the content recorded  
on the HDD is erased).  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About DVD  
Types of Discs that Can Be  
Used with This Recorder  
• DVD video players and discs have region numbers,  
which dictate the regions in which a disc can be played.  
The region number for this product is 2. (Discs marked  
ALL will play in any player.)  
• DVD Video operations and functions may be different  
from the explanations in this manual and some operations  
may be prohibited due to disc manufacturer’s setting.  
• If “CANNOT OPERATE THIS FUNCTION.” or “THIS  
OPERATION IS PROHIBITED BY THE DISC.” is displayed,  
either the disc or Recorder is prohibiting the function.  
Read the disc’s manual along with this manual.  
• If a menu screen or operating instructions are displayed  
during playback of a disc, follow the operating procedure  
displayed.  
•
Since this Recorder is compatible with the PAL format, use  
discs that contain the letters “PAL” on the disc or package.  
NTSC and PAL-60 signals cannot be recorded.  
(A black screen is shown when NTSC or PAL-60  
signals are input to the external input.)  
The following discs can be played back and recorded with  
this Recorder. Do not use an 8 cm (3") adapter (for CDs).  
•
• Use discs that are compatible with standards as indi-  
cated by the presence of the following logo marks on the  
disc label. Playback of discs not complying with these  
standards is not guaranteed. In addition, image quality or  
sound quality is not guaranteed even if such discs are  
able to be played back.  
• This Recorder conforms to the PAL colour system. Also  
you can play discs recorded with the NTSC system via a  
PAL system TV set.  
• JPEG files cannot be played back.  
Discs For Recording and Playback  
Discs that Cannot Be Used with  
This Recorder  
Recording  
Disc Type  
Contents  
Disc Size  
Format  
VR mode  
DVD-RW  
•Ver.1.1  
12 cm (5"),  
•Ver.1.1  
Video mode  
single-sided/  
double-sided,  
single layer disc  
8 cm (3"), single-  
sided, single  
layer disc *2  
I The following discs are unable to be played back or  
are not played back properly on this Recorder. If such  
a disc is mistakenly played back, the speakers may  
be damaged due to the large volume. Never attempt  
(CPRM  
Audio + Video  
(Movie)  
compatible)*1  
•Ver.1.1/2g  
(CPRM  
compatible)*1  
to play back such discs.  
DVD-R  
•Ver.2.0  
•Ver.2.0/4g*3  
Video mode  
CDG, Photo CD, CD-ROM, CD-TEXT, CD-EXTRA, SVCD,  
SACD, PD, CDV, CVD, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-Audio  
4.7  
*1  
*2  
“Copy Once” broadcasts and other programmes that  
can be recorded only once can be recorded.  
DVD-RW/R 8 cm (3") single-sided, single-layer discs can  
only be used for recording in the Video mode. Some  
discs of this type may not be able to be recorded.  
Not compatible with 4g high speed dubbing. When high  
speed dubbing is used, the system will switch to 2g.  
I Discs with unusual shapes cannot be played.  
• Discs with unusual shapes (heart-shaped or hexagonal  
discs, etc.) cannot be used. The use of such discs will  
cause a fault.  
*3  
I The following DVD video discs cannot be played.  
• Discs not containing “2” or “ALL” for the region number  
(discs sold outside the authorized marketing area).*5  
• Discs produced illegally.  
Discs for Playback (Playback Only)  
• Discs recorded for commercial use.  
Recording  
*5  
The region number for this product is 2.  
Disc Type  
Contents  
Audio + Video 12 cm (5")  
(Movie) 8 cm (3")  
Disc Size  
Format  
I The following DVD-RW/R, DVD+RW/R discs cannot be  
played.  
DVD Video Region  
number  
Video mode  
• Discs on which data has not been recorded cannot be  
played back.  
ALL  
2
• Discs may not be played back depending on the  
recorder used for recording.  
I The following Audio CD discs cannot be played.  
• Discs containing a signal for the purpose of protecting  
copyrights (copy control signal) may not be played  
back with this Recorder.  
DVD+RW/DVD+R  
Video CD  
Video mode  
Audio + Video 12 cm (5")  
(finalized disc (Movie)  
only)  
Video CD  
Audio + Video  
(Movie)  
• This Recorder has been designed on the premise of  
playing back Audio CDs that comply with CD (Com-  
pact Disc) standards.  
Audio CD *4  
Audio CD  
(CD-DA)  
Audio  
12 cm (5")  
8 cm (3")  
I The following CD-RW/R discs cannot be played.  
• Discs on which data has not been recorded cannot be  
played back.  
CD-RW/CD-R  
Audio CD  
(CD-DA)  
Audio  
• Non-finalized discs cannot be played back.  
• Discs recorded in a format other than a Video CD/  
Audio CD and MP3 file format*6 cannot be played back.  
• Discs may not be played back depending on their  
recording status or the status of the disc itself.  
• Discs may not be played back depending on their  
compatibility with this Recorder or the recorder used  
for recording.  
MP3 file  
Video CD  
Audio + Video  
(Movie)  
*4  
This Recorder has been designed on the premise of  
playing back Audio CDs that comply with CD (Compact  
Disc) standards. CDs containing a signal for the purpose  
of protecting copyrights (copy control signal) may not be  
able to be played back with this Recorder.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
        
Æ
        
Playing MP3 discs  
• The MP3 files are not played in the order they were  
recorded.  
        
Æ
        
The following files cannot be played on this  
Recorder.  
About DVD  
*6 About MP3 file format  
Types of Discs for Recording  
MP3 files are audio data compressed in MPEG1 Audio  
layer 3 file format. “MP3 files” have “.mp3” as extensions.  
(Some files that have “.mp3” extensions or files that have  
not been recorded in MP3 format will produce noise or  
cannot be played.)  
• DVD-RW and DVD-R discs can be recorded with this  
Recorder. The recording format that can be selected may  
vary according to the disc version and type of disc.  
• Make sure to use a disc that has the words “For Video” or  
“For Recording” on the disc or disc jacket for recording  
and playback with this Recorder.  
Recording Format  
Disc Type  
VR mode  
Video mode  
• The maximum number of layers which can be  
recognized, including files and folders, is 8.  
• The multi-session discs cannot be played.  
• It is recommended to record data at a lower speed as  
data recorded at fast speed can produce noise and  
may not be able to be played.  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1  
(CPRM)  
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2g  
(CPRM)  
×
×
DVD-R Ver. 2.0  
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4g  
—
×
• The more folders there are, the longer the reading  
time.  
• Depending on the folder tree, reading MP3 files can  
take time.  
DVD-RW Discs  
• Folder or track (file) names are limited to 8 characters.  
Folder or track (file) names that go over 8 characters  
will be abbreviated. (Certain letters or symbols in  
folder names or title name may not be displayed.)  
• The playing time may not be correctly displayed  
during MP3 file playback.  
• DVD-RW discs are available in Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1  
(CPRM compatible) or Ver. 1.1/2g (CPRM  
compatible).  
• When a disc has been recorded in the VR mode, it  
can be recorded and erased repeatedly. Erasure also  
allows the recording time to be increased.  
• When a disc has been recorded in the Video mode,  
additional recording is possible until the disc is full.  
The recording time does not increase*7 even if titles  
are erased, but if the disc is initialized (see pages 15  
and 99) full recording time is possible.  
• Discs that have more than 257 folders or 1,000 files.  
• When both Audio CD format and MP3 files format are  
recorded on a disc. (The disc is recognized to be an  
Audio CD and only tracks in the Audio CD format are  
played back.)  
*7  
Recording time can only be increased when the last  
title is erased (titles cannot be erased after a disc  
has been finalized).  
DVD-R Discs  
• DVD-R discs can only be recorded in the Video  
mode.  
• Although additional recordings can be made until the  
disc is full, disc space does not increase even if titles  
are erased (because erasure here refers only to  
making the titles not visible).  
• Although these discs can be played back with other  
DVD players once they have been finalized, the discs  
can no longer be recorded or erased after they have  
been finalized.  
• Discs can be additionally recorded and edited with  
this Recorder only until they are finalized.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                                       
Æ
                                                       
VR mode  
                                                       
Æ
                                                       
Video mode  
About DVD  
Recording Formats  
Recording Time  
• There are two recording formats available with this  
Recorder: the VR mode and the Video mode.  
• The recording format that can be selected may differ  
depending on the disc. Refer to the section on Types of  
Discs for Recording (page 12).  
• The recording mode that can be set varies according to  
the recording format. Refer to the table below for the  
applicable recording mode.  
Recording  
Recordable Time  
About 60 minutes  
Description  
Mode  
• Recording in the VR mode and Video mode cannot be  
mixed on one disc.  
FINE  
When you want to record high-  
quality images.  
SP  
LP  
About 120 minutes  
About 240 minutes  
This is the standard recording  
mode.  
VR (Video Recording) Mode  
The VR mode is the basic DVD-RW recording format,  
and lets you enjoy the various editing functions  
When you want to record for a long  
period of time with slightly lower  
image quality.  
available with this Recorder.  
EP  
About 360 minutes  
When you want to place priority on  
recording time.  
• When a disc has been recorded in the VR mode, it can  
be recorded and erased repeatedly. Erasure also allows  
the recording time to be increased.  
• Recordable time is based on the recording time when  
using a 4.7 GB disc. Since recording capacity varies  
according to the recorded material, there may be cases  
where there is much more disc space remaining on the  
disc when recording is completed.  
• Refer to page 41 about the recordable times when you  
choose “MN” (manual) Recording mode.  
* Since recording to DVD is performed using VBR (variable  
bit rate, refer to the section on VBR Control on page 109)  
with the exception of some recording modes, recording  
time varies according to the material to be recorded.  
• Recorded discs can only be played back with DVD-RW  
compatible DVD players*8.  
• “Copy Once” programmes can also be recorded*9.  
*8  
• Although there are some cases in which the disc must  
be finalized, the disc can be recorded and erased  
after it has been finalized.  
• DVD-RW compatible DVD players have the following  
indication.  
DVD players with this indication have the function of  
being able to play back DVD-RW discs recorded in  
the VR mode with a DVD recorder.  
• Recordable time may be shorter than that indicated above in  
the case of recording material of poor image quality such as  
broadcasts from televisions with poor reception.  
• This does not guarantee the length of recording time. Actual  
recording time may be shorter than that indicated above  
depending on image quality and other aspects.  
• The total of recording time and remaining time may not always  
agree with the recordable time of the recording mode.  
• Block-like images may become conspicuous during scenes  
containing rapid movement due to the characteristics of digital  
image compression technology.  
*9  
When using a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 disc (CPRM compatible).  
Recorded programmes cannot be played back with  
other DVD players (including DVD-RW players) or DVD  
recorders not compatible with CPRM.  
Video Mode  
This recording format is compatible with commercially  
available DVD players and DVD-ROM drives.  
• Discs recorded in the Video mode cannot be recorded  
repeatedly or their content overwritten.  
• When recording in the Video mode, discs can be played  
back, additionally recorded and edited only with this  
Recorder until they are finalized. Editing functions are  
limited.  
• Discs recorded in the Video mode can be played back  
with other DVD players by finalizing them after recording.  
(However, this does not guarantee that these discs can  
be played back on all DVD players.)  
Disc Remaining Time  
• Additional recordings can be made as long as there is  
available space on the disc. (Additional recordings  
can also be made after the disc is finalized.)  
• Erasing unnecessary recordings lets you increase the  
remaining time on the disc. (The disc can also be  
erased after it has been finalized.)  
• When a Play List (see page 77) is created, disc space  
will not increase even if portions of titles or titles of  
Play List are erased.  
• Recordings onto DVD-RW/R discs using the Video mode  
employ a new standard approved by the DVD Forum in  
2000, and compatibility with this standard is left to the  
discretion of the respective DVD player manufacturer.  
Consequently, there are some models of DVD players  
and DVD-ROM drives that are unable to play back DVD-  
RW/R discs.  
• Additional recordings can be made with this Recorder  
provided there is available space on the disc until the  
disc is finalized.  
• In case you record on a DVD-RW disc, recordable  
time will increase if you erase the last recorded title  
unless you finalize the DVD-RW disc.  
• “Copy Once” programmes cannot be recorded.  
• In case you record on a DVD-R disc, recordable time  
will not increase even if you erase titles (see page 76).  
(The erase function only hides the title, it does not  
actually erase it. It does not actually delete the  
recorded contents.)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select the disc and recording format to be used  
according to the objective of the recording.  
Select the disc and recording format by referring  
to the table below.  
                                                 
Æ
                                                 
This Recorder is equipped with a copy guard  
function that prevents recording of video software  
or broadcast programmes that contain a signal that  
restricts copying in accordance with copyrights and  
so forth.  
                                                 
Æ
                                                 
The proper image may not be obtained in the case  
a copy guard signal is contained in the images  
input from equipment connected to the external  
input jacks (LINE 1, LINE 2, LINE IN 3 or DV IN) of  
this Recorder.  
                                                 
Æ
                                                 
About DVD  
Using the Proper Disc  
Unrecordable Material  
Objective  
Disc Used  
Recording Format  
Example:  
• DVD videos  
•
When you want to play  
Recordable  
Video mode  
back a recorded disc with DVD-RW disc recording  
• PPV (pay-per-view) broadcasts  
a DVD player or DVD  
Video compatible PC  
• When you want to  
repeatedly record and  
erase a recorded disc  
Ver. 1.1 or Ver.  
1.1 (CPRM  
compatible)  
+
finalization  
• When you want to edit  
a disc recorded with  
this Recorder  
Recordable  
VR mode  
Example:  
DVD-RW disc recording  
• Images not output at proper brightness  
• Incorrect output of picture size and other data  
Connect such equipment directly to your TV  
without going through this Recorder.  
In the case a copy guard signal is contained in a  
source video that occurs part way through record-  
ing, recording is paused at that point. Recording  
resumes when the copy guard signal is no longer  
present, while no recordings will be made for the  
part where the copy prevention signal is present.  
Ver. 1.1 or  
• When playing back with Ver. 1.1  
+
(finalization)  
a DVD-RW compatible  
player with the  
following indication  
(CPRM  
compatible)  
• When you want to  
repeatedly record and  
erase a recorded disc  
• When you want to  
record a “Copy Once”  
Recordable  
DVD-RW disc recording  
VR mode  
satellite broadcast, etc. Ver. 1.1  
(CPRM  
compatible)  
•
When you want to play  
back a recorded disc with  
a DVD player or DVD  
Video compatible PC  
Recordable  
DVD-R disc  
Video mode  
recording  
+
finalization  
4.7  
• When not re-recording a  
recorded disc (when  
making a permanent  
recording or when you  
do not want the  
recording to be erased)  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initialization and Finalization  
Initialization (Formatting)  
Initialization is required when using DVD-RW discs in the Video mode. (See page 99 for details about Initializa-  
tion.)  
When an unused DVD-RW disc is placed in the Recorder immediately after the disc has been purchased, the Recorder is set  
to automatically begin initializing in the VR mode. The settings can also be changed so that discs are initialized in the Video  
mode (page 99).  
When using a DVD-RW disc in the Video mode without changing this setting, initialize the disc in the Video mode after first  
completing initialization in the VR mode (page 99).  
• Initialization causes the entire previously recorded contents of the disc to be erased.  
• It takes about 1 minute to 1 minute and 30 seconds for initialization to be completed.  
Allowing Discs to Be Played Back with Other DVD Players (Finalization)  
Discs must always be finalized in order to play them back with another DVD player after having been recorded in  
the Video mode. (See page 99 for details about Finalization)  
Finalize discs on which all recordings have been completed so that they can be viewed with another DVD player or a DVD  
Video compatible PC. Discs that are not finalized may not be able to be played back with other DVD players or DVD Video  
compatible PCs. (However, this does not guarantee that finalized discs can be played back on all DVD players or DVD Video  
compatible PCs.)  
• Finalizing a DVD-R disc prevents all recording and editing of that disc.  
• Although DVD-RW discs can be re-recorded by initializing even after they have been recorded in the Video mode and  
finalized, all previously recorded contents are erased.  
• Finalization is required if a disc recorded in the VR mode cannot be played back with a DVD-RW compatible player. (Discs  
formatted in the VR mode can be recorded and edited even after finalization.)  
• Finalization takes from several minutes to about an hour. (Processing takes longer if there is considerable available space  
on the disc.)  
The following operations may cause malfunction.  
• Operating discs recorded or edited by this Recorder in a DVD recorder or PC’s DVD drive manufactured by other manu-  
facturers.  
• Using the discs in above situation again with this Recorder.  
• Operating discs recorded or edited by a DVD recorder or PC’s DVD drive made by other manufacturers than the one for  
this Recorder.  
About the Contents of the Disc  
Title, Chapter and Track  
• DVDs are divided into “Titles” and “Chapters”. If the disc  
has more than one movie on it, each movie would be a  
separate “Title”. “Chapters”, on the other hand, are  
subdivisions of titles. (See Example 1.)  
Example 1: DVD  
• Video CDs and Audio CDs are divided into “Tracks”. You  
can think of a “Track” as one tune on an Audio CD. (See  
Example 2.)  
Title 1  
Title 2  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 1  
Chapter 2  
Recording on a DVD-RW/R disc  
• One recording is treated as one title and the chapters will  
be inserted automatically every 10 minutes. You can  
choose the chapter interval from the following: 10  
minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or off (page 87).  
• Each title, chapter and track will be numbered in order.  
Title, chapter and track may not be numbered in some  
discs.  
Example 2: Video CD or Audio CD  
Track 1  
Track 2  
Track 3  
Track 4  
Track 5  
Recording on a DVD-RW disc in VR mode  
• When you pause during recording or erase the scene using edit function, chapter marks will be inserted automatically. You  
can also insert chapter marks at your favorite scenes (page 74).  
Recording in Video mode  
• You cannot insert chapter marks at your favorite scenes.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About the Contents of the Disc  
x Subtitle languages  
Icons Used on DVD Video Disc Case  
This indicates the kind of subtitles.  
When you buy a DVD Video disc, the back of the disc case  
usually contains various information about the contents of  
the disc.  
c Screen aspect ratio  
Movies are shot in a variety of screen modes.  
1
2
v Camera angle  
Recorded onto some DVD discs are scenes which have  
been simultaneously shot from a number of different  
angles (the same scene is shot from the front, from the  
left side, from the right side, etc.).  
1. English  
2. Chinese  
1. English  
2. Chinese  
2
2
3
4
5
b Region code  
This indicates the region code (playable region  
number).  
1 23  
4 56  
16:9 LB  
2
The Icons Used in This  
Operation Manual  
z Audio tracks and audio formats  
DVD discs can contain up to 8 separate tracks with a  
different language on each. The first in the list is the  
original track.  
This section also details the audio format of each  
soundtrack—Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG etc.  
HDD  
...................... Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for the hard disc.  
.............. Indicates the functions that can be  
DVD VIDEO  
performed for DVD Video discs.  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
... Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for DVD-RW discs.  
VR MODE:  
Dolby Digital  
A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc.  
that gives movie theatre ambience to audio output when  
the Recorder is connected to a Dolby Digital processor  
or amplifier.  
• Indicates that the function will  
operate when recording in VR mode  
or playing back a disc recorded in  
VR mode.  
DTS  
VIDEO MODE:  
DTS is a digital sound system developed by Digital  
Theater Systems for use in cinemas. This system uses 6  
audio channels and provides accurate sound field  
positioning and realistic acoustics. (By connecting a  
DTS Digital Surround decoder, you can also listen to  
DTS Digital Surround sound.)  
• Indicates that the function will  
operate when recording in Video  
mode or playing back a disc  
recorded in Video mode.  
DVD-R  
................... Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for DVD-R discs.  
Linear PCM  
VIDEO CD  
AUDIO CD  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for Video CDs.  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for Audio CDs.  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for CD-R discs in MP3  
format.  
.................. Indicates the functions that can be  
performed for CD-RW discs in MP3  
format.  
Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio  
CDs.  
The sound on Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with  
16 bits. (On DVD discs, sound is recorded at between  
48 kHz with 16 bits and 96 kHz with 24 bits.)  
CD-R  
MP3  
MPEG  
CD-RW  
MPEG Audio gives movie theatre ambience to audio  
output when the Recorder is connected to an MPEG  
Audio 5.1 channel processor or amplifier.  
MP3  
NOTE  
• This Recorder supports 2-channel(L/R) audio and  
5.1ch(Multi-channel) MPEG Audio 1/2(only when the  
DIGITAL AUDIO Output COAXIAL jack is used for  
connection). It does not support 7.1 channel MPEG  
Audio Version 2.0.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Information  
Disc Precautions  
Copyright  
• Recording and playback of any material may require  
consent. Please refer particularly to the provisions of the  
copyright Act 1956, the Dramatic and Musical Performers  
Protection Act 1958, the Performers Protection Acts 1963  
and 1972 and to any subsequent statutory enactments  
and orders.  
Be Careful of Scratches and Dust  
• DVD-RW and DVD-R discs are sensitive to dust, finger-  
prints and especially scratches. A scratched disc may  
not be able to be recorded, or important data recorded  
may not be able to be played back. Handle discs with  
care and store them in a safe place.  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology  
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents  
and other intellectual property right owned by Macrovision  
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
Proper Disc Storage  
Place the disc in the centre of  
the disc case and store the  
case and disc upright.  
Avoid storing discs in locations  
subject to direct sunlight, next  
to heating appliances or in  
locations of high humidity.  
Do not drop discs or subject  
them to strong vibrations or  
impacts.  
Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603,  
4,577,216, 4,819,098 and 4,907,093 licensed for  
limited viewing uses only.  
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories.  
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of Digital  
Theater Systems, Inc.  
Avoid storing discs in locations  
where there are large amounts  
of dust or locations where mold  
tends to grow easily.  
• Certain audio features of this product manufactured  
under a license from Desper Products, Inc. Spatializer®  
N-2-2™ and the circle-in-square device are trademarks  
owned by Desper Products, Inc.  
• The DVD logo is a registered trademark.  
• i.LINK refers to the IEEE 1394-1995 industry specification  
Handling Precautions  
• If the surface is soiled, wipe gently with a soft, damp  
(water only) cloth. When wiping discs, always move the  
cloth from the centre hole toward the outer edge.  
and extensions thereof. The  
logo is used for products  
compliant with the i.LINK standard.  
•
is a trademark.  
• Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzene, thinner,  
static electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.  
• Do not touch the surface.  
• Do not stick paper or adhesive labels to the disc.  
• If the playing surface of a disc is soiled or scratched, the  
Recorder may decide that the disc is incompatible and  
eject the disc tray, or it may fail to play the disc correctly.  
Wipe any soiling off the playing surface with a soft cloth.  
• VIDEO Plus+ and PlusCode are registered trademarks of  
Gemstar Development Corporation. The VIDEO Plus+  
system is manufactured under license from Gemstar  
Development Corporation.  
Cautions Regarding Recording  
Æ Always Make Sure to Test Record First  
• Make a test recording with a DVD-RW disc first before  
making any important recordings to confirm whether  
or not the recorded material is recorded properly.  
Cleaning the Pick Up Lens  
• Never use commercially available cleaning discs. The  
use of these discs can damage the lens.  
• Request cleaning of the lens to the nearest service centre  
approved by Sharp.  
Æ Compensation for Recordings  
• In the event a recording is unable to be made due to a  
problem with this Recorder or a disc, or due to an  
external factor such as a power failure or condensa-  
tion of moisture and so forth, the manufacturer is not  
responsible for compensation for unrecorded contents  
or incidental damages.  
Warning of Dew Formation  
• Dew may form on pick up lens or disc in the following  
conditions:  
• Immediately after a heater has been turned on.  
• In a steamy or very humid room.  
• When the Recorder is suddenly moved from a cold  
environment to a warm one.  
When dew forms:  
It becomes difficult for the Recorder to read the signals  
on the disc and prevents the Recorder from operating  
properly.  
To remove dew:  
Take out the disc and leave the recorder with the power  
off until the dew disappears. Using the recorder with  
dew formation may cause malfunction.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Major Components  
Main Unit (Front)  
1
2 3  
4
5
6
7
8
To open the  
front door, lay  
your finger on  
this part and pull  
toward you.  
9
10  
11  
12 13 14 15  
16 17 18 19  
1 OPERATE (p. 24)  
7 Disc tray (p. 38)  
8 OPEN/CLOSE (p. 38)  
9 RESET (p. 103)  
10 LINE IN 3 (p. 86)  
• AUDIO Input jacks  
• VIDEO Input jack  
• S-VIDEO Input jack  
12 Æ REC (p. 37)  
13 REC STOP (p. 37)  
14 REC PAUSE (p. 37)  
15 HDD (p. 33)  
2 STANDBY indicator (p. 24)  
3 TIMER indicator (p. 43)  
4 CHANNEL "/'  
5 PLAY/REC indicators  
(for HDD) (pp. 37, 53)  
6 PLAY/REC indicators  
(for DVD) (pp. 39, 58)  
16 DVD (p. 33)  
17 | PLAY (p. 53)  
18 I STOP/LIVE (pp. 32, 53)  
11 DV IN terminal (p. 84)  
19 STILL/PAUSE (pp. 35, 56)  
Front Panel Display  
1 PDC/VPS indicator  
2 Disc Remaining Time indicator (p. 32)  
3 Title indicator (p. 32)  
1
2
3
7
8
9
4 Dubbing indicator (p. 50)  
5 Recording Mode indicator (p. 37)  
6 DVD indicator (p. 22)  
7 Decoder indicator  
8 Chapter indicator (p. 32)  
9 Information Display (p. 32)  
10 Tamper Proof indicator (p. 36)  
11 Simple Recording Timer indicator (p. 37)  
4
5
6
10  
11  
Main Unit (Rear)  
1 ANTENNA OUT jack (p. 22)  
2 ANTENNA IN jack (p. 22)  
3 21-pin Euro-SCART (LINE 1 (TV)) (p. 22)  
4 21-pin Euro-SCART (LINE 2 (DE-  
CODER/EXT)) (p. 22)  
5
COMPONENT Video Output jacks (p. 23)  
1
2
5
6
6 VIDEO Output jack (p. 23)  
7 AUDIO Output jacks (p. 82)  
8 S-VIDEO Output jack (p. 23)  
9 DIGITAL AUDIO Output COAXIAL jack  
(p. 82)  
10 DIGITAL AUDIO Output OPTICAL  
terminal (p. 82)  
3
4
7
8
9 10  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Major Components  
Remote Control Unit  
1 OPERATE (p. 24)  
OPEN/CLOSE (p. 38)  
2
3 Number buttons (pp. 21, 42)  
4 TV/DVD (p. 22)  
5 TIMER ON/OFF (p. 43)  
6 TIME SHIFT (p. 35)  
1
2
19  
20  
7* START MENU (p. 26)  
8* HDD (p. 33)  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
3
9* REC LIST/DVD TITLE (pp. 54, 62)  
10* Cursor buttons ('/" /\ /|) (p. 25)  
11* EXIT (p. 26)  
+
VIDEO Plus  
4
5
6
7
8
9
12 Blue (A), Red (B), Green (C), Yellow (D) (p. 54)  
13*  
REV (pp. 35, 56, 60)  
14* STILL/PAUSE (pp. 35, 56, 60)  
15* I STOP/LIVE (pp. 35, 53, 59)  
28  
16  
F.ADV  
,
SKIP  
(pp. 56, 59, 60)  
29  
17 Æ REC (pp. 37, 39)  
10  
18 REC STOP (pp. 37, 39)  
19 TV CONTROL buttons (p. 21)  
20 CH " /'  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
21 DIRECT (p. 55)  
22 VIDEO Plus+ (p. 42)  
23 ERASE (pp. 42, 46)  
24 DUBBING (p. 49)  
25 P IN P (p. 66)  
17  
36  
37  
18  
26 INPUT/ Repeat (pp. 57, 60, 85)  
27* DVD (p. 33)  
28* ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST/DVD MENU  
(pp. 54, 62, 69)  
29* SET/ENTER (pp. 24, 26)  
30* n RETURN (p. 26)  
31* | PLAY (pp. 35, 53, 59)  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
32*  
FWD (pp. 35, 56, 60)  
33* SLOW (pp. 56, 60)  
34 REPLAY (pp. 56, 60)  
35 SKIP SEARCH (pp. 56, 60)  
36 REC MODE/ ZOOM (pp. 37, 39, 57, 61)  
37 REC PAUSE (pp. 37, 39)  
38 ANGLE (p. 61)  
39 FUNCTION (p. 64)  
40 DIRECT REC TV (p. 41)  
41 CHAPTER MARK/RGB OFF (pp. 23, 37, 39, 53, 58)  
42 AUDIO (pp. 31, 57, 61)  
43 SUBTITLE (p. 61)  
NOTE  
• Buttons marked with “ ” are made of  
luminous rubber for easy visibility even in  
the dark. (The degree of brightness will  
decrease as time passes.)  
44 DISPLAY/BACKLIGHT (p. 32)  
45 ON SCREEN (p. 31)  
*
46 TAMPER PROOF (p. 36)  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Major Components  
Loading the Batteries  
1 While pressing Y down, 2 Load the batteries.  
3 Slide the battery cover  
in the direction of the  
arrow until it clicks.  
slide the battery cover in  
the direction of the  
arrow.  
Load the two R-03 size batteries (“AAA”  
size, UM/SUM-4) supplied with the  
remote control unit. Make sure that the  
battery poles  
as indicated.  
and  
are positioned  
NOTE  
• Do not subject the remote control unit to shock, water or excessive humidity.  
• The remote control unit may not function if the Recorder’s remote sensor is in direct sunlight or any other strong light.  
• Incorrect use of batteries may cause them to leak or burst. Read the battery warnings and use the batteries properly.  
• Do not mix old and new batteries, or mix different brands.  
• Remove the batteries if you will not use the remote control unit for an extended period of time.  
Operating range of remote control  
Remote sensor  
About 30°  
About 30°  
Front 7m  
Remote control  
unit  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Major Components  
Operating a TV Using the  
Remote Control  
Setting the Remote  
Control Code  
• Two types of remote control codes operate  
this Recorder: RC-1 and RC-2. If you  
operate this Recorder by remote control  
along with another SHARP DVD recorder or  
DVD player placed next to it simulta-  
neously, switching the remote control code  
(both the Recorder and remote control) to  
one of the signals (RC-1 or RC-2) will let  
you operate only with this Recorder.  
• Make sure to set the Recorder and remote  
control to the same remote code. You can  
not operate the Recorder if they are not set  
to the same code.  
(
Universal Remote Control)  
The Universal Remote Control may operate the  
basic functions of 16 different types of TVs.  
To enter the Manufacturer’s Code for your TV,  
follow the instructions below.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
There is no guarantee that the universal  
remote control will function with your TV.  
Setting the  
Manufacturer’s Code  
1 Press OPERATE and CH ' of  
TV CONTROL simultaneously.  
Setting the Remote Con-  
2 Enter the 2-digit Manufacturer’s  
Code with the Number buttons  
(Ex. 02-“0”, “2”) within 10  
seconds after releasing OPER-  
ATE and CH ' of TV CON-  
TROL.  
trol Code of the Remote  
Example: Setting the code to “RC-2”.  
1 Press and hold OPERATE and 2  
together for more than 5 seconds.  
2 Press OPERATE of this Recorder  
to see if you can turn it on/off.  
• If you cannot, go to step 3.  
3 Point the remote control unit  
towards the TV and then press  
OPERATE of TV CONTROL.  
• If the TV turns on/off, setup was  
successful. If not, repeat the proce-  
dure using another code.  
NOTE  
• The remote control code of the remote  
becomes “RC-1” when you change the  
batteries.  
See the list below for the Manufacturer’s Code  
and the buttons which work.  
TV Brand  
FERGUSON  
GRUNDIG  
HITACHI  
ITT NOKIA  
JVC  
MITSUBISHI  
PANASONIC 1  
PANASONIC 2  
PHILIPS  
SANYO  
SHARP 1  
SHARP 2  
SONY  
THOMSON 1  
THOMSON 2  
TOSHIBA  
Manufacturer's Code  
Setting the Remote Con-  
trol Code of the Recorder  
07  
06  
13  
08  
15  
16  
11  
12  
03  
14  
01  
02  
09  
04  
05  
10  
3 Press OPERATE to turn off the  
Recorder.  
CHANNEL Front display  
'/" panel  
4 Press and hold CHANNEL " and  
CHANNEL ' on the Recorder  
together for more than 5 seconds.  
• Each time this operation is performed,  
the code of the Recorder toggles  
between “RC-1” and “RC-2”. The front  
panel display changes as the code  
changes.  
• Press OPERATE on the remote  
control to see if you can turn on/off  
the Recorder.  
TV function control  
If remote control does not  
• TV Power: OPERATE  
work  
• TV Channel up/down: CH ' / "  
• TV Volume up/down: VOL +/-  
• TV-AV Selector: INPUT  
Press OPERATE on the remote control and  
check the front panel display (RC-1 or RC-2).  
Set the remote control code according to the  
display and press OPERATE to see if you  
can turn on/off the Recorder.  
NOTE  
• If the batteries in the remote control unit are  
changed, the code settings must be re-  
entered.  
• Some brands have more than one code  
listed above, due to changes in the codes.  
In such cases, try another code to find the  
code that operates your TV.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Connection  
1 Connect the TV antenna  
cable to the ANTENNA IN  
jack on the rear of this  
Recorder.  
Connection Using Antenna Cables and SCART  
Cables  
The following connection is the basic connection to watch or record TV  
programmes.  
2 Connect the ANTENNA  
OUT jack on the rear of  
this Recorder to the  
Important!  
• Be sure to turn off and unplug from the AC outlet this Recorder and all  
antenna input jack on your  
TV using the supplied  
coaxial cable.  
equipment before connecting the cables.  
• Read through the operation manual for the equipment to be connected.  
3 Connect the LINE 1(TV)  
jack on the rear of this  
Recorder to the SCART  
input jack on your TV using  
the SCART cable (commer-  
cially available).  
When connecting with your  
Satellite receiver or de-  
coder  
To ANTENNA  
Antenna cable  
IN jack  
(commercially available)  
4 Connect the LINE 2(DE-  
CODER/EXT) jack on the  
rear of this Recorder to the  
SCART output jack on your  
Satellite receiver or de-  
coder using the SCART  
cable (commercially  
1
available).  
The Recorder  
To ANTENNA  
NOTE  
OUT jack  
• To connect using S-video or  
component cables, see “Using  
Other Types of Video Output” on  
page 23.  
To LINE 1(TV)  
SCART  
To LINE 2  
SCART  
2
3
Important!  
• When connecting to your TV using  
SCART cable:  
SCART cable  
(commercially  
available)  
When playing back HDD/DVD, the  
recorder side input is selected  
automatically. When the channel is  
changed at the TV side under this  
setting, the selection is normally  
changed to the reception channel,  
but it may not be changed for  
certain TV models. If this happens,  
press the TV/DVD button on the  
remote control.  
Coaxial cable  
(supplied)  
SCART cable  
(commercially  
available)  
4
To SCART  
input  
To SCART  
output  
To antenna  
input jack  
Decoder or Satellite System  
TV  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Connection  
Using Other Types of Video Output  
In order to view clearer DVD images, it is recommended that you use a commer-  
cially available S-video or component video cable when connecting your TV to the  
video output.  
TV  
Connecting Using  
an S-video or Video  
Cable and Audio  
Cable  
Connect the S-VIDEO or VIDEO  
Output jack on this Recorder to  
the S-video or video input jack  
on your TV using an S-video  
cable (commercially available)  
or Video/Audio cable (supplied).  
To S-video  
input jack  
To video/audio  
input jacks  
NOTE  
or  
• When connecting both S-video  
cable and Video/Audio cable to the  
Recorder, the image of S-video  
cable is displayed.  
Video/Audio cable  
(supplied)  
S-video cable  
(commercially available)  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
output jacks  
To S-VIDEO  
output jack  
The Recorder  
TV  
Connecting Using  
the component  
Video Cable  
Connect the COMPONENT OUT  
jacks on this Recorder to the  
component input jacks on your  
TV using a component video  
cable (commercially available).  
To audio  
input jacks  
Video/Audio cable  
(supplied)  
Important!  
To component  
input jacks  
• When using this connection:  
If the option under “START MENU”  
- “OTHER SETTINGS 2” - “MODE  
SETTING” - “L1 OUT” is changed  
to “RGB”, no picture is displayed  
on the TV. In this case, hold down  
the RGB OFF button on the remote  
control (under the cover) for more  
than 2 seconds.  
Component video cable  
(commercially available)  
To AUDIO  
output jacks  
The Recorder  
To COMPONENT  
OUT jacks  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Installation  
Turning the Power On  
Press OPERATE on the remote  
control or Recorder to turn on the  
power of Recorder.  
Using the AUTO  
INSTALLATION  
for initial setting  
• When you turn on power, the HDD button  
and DVD button on the front of Recorder  
will blink. If either the HDD or DVD button is  
blinking, system processing is in progress,  
When the Recorder power is turned on for the  
first time after purchase, the “AUTO INSTAL-  
LATION” screen is displayed. You can use the  
AUTO INSTALLATION function for easy initial  
settings regarding TV channel. From the  
second time on, the “AUTO INSTALLATION”  
screen will not appear.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
so wait until the button lights up.  
•
When the Recorder power is turned on for the  
first time after purchase, the “AUTO INSTAL-  
LATION” screen is displayed. Follow the  
procedure shown on pages 24 to 25.  
Preparation  
• Turn on the power of TV and switch to the  
AV input used to connect to the Recorder.  
To Turn the Power Off  
Press OPERATE on the remote  
1 Press OPERATE for the first time  
control or Recorder to turn off power.  
after purchase.  
• The HDD or DVD button on the front of  
Recorder will go out, and the STANDBY  
indicator will light up.  
AUTO I NSTA L L AT I ON  
• If you press OPERATE again immediately  
after turning off, the Recorder may not turn  
on. If this happens, wait a while and then  
turn on power again.  
PRESS ENT ER KEY TO ST ART  
About the Power Supply  
• Do not unplug the power cord immedi-  
ately after you plug it into the AC outlet  
(less than about 15 seconds after  
plugging in). In very rare cases, this  
may cause the memory to revert to its  
initial state, and all timer programmes  
will be erased. If you pull out the power  
plug while power is on, it will take a  
while for the hard disc to get ready  
when you turn on power the next time.  
During this time you can only view live  
broadcasts.  
• If you turn on power in a low-tempera-  
ture environment, only live broadcast  
viewing is possible until the hard disc  
(HDD) reaches its operating tempera-  
ture.  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
• The “AUTO INSTALLATION” screen is  
displayed.  
2 Press SET/ENTER to continue  
with the installation.  
P L EASE BE SURE T HE  
AER I A L / SCART CABL E I S  
CONNECTED .  
PRESS ENT ER TO CONT I NUE .  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Auto Installation  
3 Ensure your Aerial cable or  
SCART cable is connected to the  
Recorder, then press SET/  
ENTER to confirm.  
5 Once Automatic Tuning is com-  
plete, the MOVE menu screen will  
appear showing all the channels  
the Recorder was able to tune in.  
4 All available terrestrial channels  
6 If you want to move any channels,  
press ' / " / \ / | to highlight  
the channel to be moved. Then  
press SET/ENTER to confirm.  
will be automatically installed.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
I When connecting with Aerial  
cable  
MOVE  
1 / 5  
1
CH 0 2  
1CH5 0  
2 BBC 1  
3 BBC 2  
4 I TV  
5CH4  
6CH5  
7
8
9
1 0  
1 1  
1 2  
1 3  
1 4  
1 5  
1 6  
1 7  
1 8  
AUTOMA T I C TUN I NG .  
P L EASE WA I T .  
--------------  
SE L ECT ED : CH5 0  
: S E L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
: NEX T  
7 Press ' / " / \ / | to highlight  
the new position for the channel.  
Then press SET/ENTER to  
confirm.  
I When connecting with SCART  
cable  
MOVE  
1 / 5  
P L EASE WA I T .  
PR 2 5  
1 BBC 1  
2 BBC 2  
3 I TV  
4CH4  
5CH5 0  
6CH5  
7
8
9
1 0  
1 1  
1 2  
1 3  
1 4  
1 5  
1 6  
1 7  
1 8  
: S E L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: NEX T  
NOTE  
• A maximum of 84 channels can be set.  
8 If any more channels are to be  
moved, repeat step 6 to 7.  
9 Press RETURN (NEXT) to display  
the “CLOCK” setting screen.  
• The “CLOCK” screen will appear.  
Refer to “Clock Setting” on page 27.  
CLOCK  
T I ME  
0 : 0 0  
DA T E  
1 / 0 1  
YEAR  
0 4  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
10After setting the clock, press  
SET/ENTER to end the AUTO  
INSTALLATION procedure.  
Important!  
•
You can perform the AUTO INSTALLATION  
function afterward by holding down  
CHANNEL ' and DVD on the front of the  
Recorder for more than 2 seconds.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About START MENU  
About START MENU  
With this Recorder, you can call up functions  
like Playback, Edit and Other Settings from  
the “START MENU”.  
For details on operation procedures, see the  
page explaining each option.  
Basic START MENU  
Operation  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the “START MENU” screen.  
[
]
START MENU REC LIST  
25/12 10:28  
1
2
3
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
+
VIDEO Plus  
[
]
START MENU REC LIST  
25/12 10:28  
DISPLAYS LIST OF RECORDED TITLES FOR PLAYBACK  
EDIT/  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
TIMER  
INITIALIZE/  
PROGRAM/  
FINALIZE  
CHECK  
ERASE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
DISPLAYS LIST OF RECORDED TITLES FOR PLAYBACK  
5
6
TIMER  
INITIALIZE/  
PROGRAM/  
FINALIZE  
CHECK  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
4
7
2 Press '/" /\ /| to select an  
option.  
OTHER  
INFORMATION  
SETTINGS 2  
8
Example: When “OTHER SETTINGS 1”  
is selected  
1 REC LIST  
[
]
START MENU OTHER SETTINGS 1  
25/12 10:28  
Playing back with REC LIST… page 54  
Calling up various functions… page 54  
2 EDIT/ERASE  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
Editing with the Original Title List/  
Play List… page 70  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
Erasing all recorded titles… page 76  
Erasing selected titles… page 76  
Protecting titles from erasure… page 75  
3 DUBBING  
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK  
INFORMATION  
OTHER  
3 Press SET/ENTER to enter the  
selected option.  
High speed dubbing… page 49  
Rate conversion dubbing… page 49  
4 TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK  
• The screen for the selected option will  
appear.  
®
Timer recording with VIDEO PLUS+ … page 42  
Timer recording by designating date and  
time… page 44  
• Operate using ' /" /\/| and SET/  
ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS 1 REC. FUNCTION  
25/12 10:28  
Checking/Changing timer settings… page 46  
5 INITIALIZE/FINALIZE  
DVD/HDD initialization… page 99  
DVD finalization… page 99  
6 OTHER SETTINGS 1  
REC. FUNCTION  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
AUTO CHAPTER  
EXACT RECORDING  
REC. AUDIO FORMAT  
EXTERNAL AUDIO  
VIDEO MODE AUDIO  
MANUAL REC. MODE  
Recording function setting… page 87  
Viewing/Play setting… page 89  
Adjustment… page 91  
4 Press START MENU or EXIT to  
quit the START MENU.  
7 OTHER SETTINGS 2  
Mode setting… page 95  
• The “START MENU” screen will close,  
and the screen will return to normal.  
Manual Tuning… page 97  
Channel sort… page 97  
Clock setting… page 98  
NOTE  
Post Code… page 98  
• If you perform no operation, the “START  
MENU” screen will disappear after about 1  
minute.  
8 INFORMATION… page 36  
• This operation will not work at the  
following times:  
During playback, during Time Shift  
Viewing, during display of the REC LIST,  
and at the erase screen.  
• If you make a mistake in operation and  
want to start over, press RETURN to go  
back to the preceding screen.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clock Setting  
5 Press \ / | to select “DATE”, then  
enter the date using the Number  
buttons or '/" .  
Clock Setting  
The clock will normally be set using the VPS/  
• For example, for 1st April press 0 1 0  
4.  
PDC information when your Recorder  
automatically tunes in the broadcast  
channels. If for any reason the VPS/PDC  
signals are not present, your Recorder will not  
be able to set the clock. This procedure will  
allow you to set the clock.  
CLOCK  
T I ME  
2 0 : 3 0  
DA T E  
1 / 0 4  
YEAR  
0 4  
+
VIDEO Plus  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the “START MENU” screen.  
[
]
START MENU REC LIST  
25/12 10:28  
DAT E : DAY / MONTH  
: SE L ECT  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
: ENT ER  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
DISPLAYS LIST OF RECORDED TITLES FOR PLAYBACK  
TIMER  
INITIALIZE/  
PROGRAM/  
FINALIZE  
CHECK  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
6
Press \ /| to select “YEAR”. Enter  
the last two digits of the year using  
the Number buttons or ' /".  
• For example, for 2005 press 0 5.  
2 Press '/"/\ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 2”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
7 Auto Clock Setting  
Press \ / | to select “∗”. Press  
'/" to change between auto  
clock on/off (“∗” is “ON”, “–” is  
“OFF”).  
MODE SET T I NG  
MANUA L TUN I NG  
CHANNE L SORT  
CLOCK SET T I NG  
POS T CODE  
CLOCK  
T I ME  
2 0 : 3 0  
DA T E  
1 / 0 4  
YEAR  
0 5  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
AD J US T  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: AUTO  
-
: OF F  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
3 Press ' /" to select “CLOCK  
SETTING”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
8 Press SET/ENTER to confirm.  
4 Enter the time using the Number  
buttons or '/".  
• If the minutes or hours are less than  
10, enter leading 0.  
CLOCK  
T I ME  
1 5 : 0 6  
DA T E  
1 / 0 1  
YEAR  
0 4  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Channel Setting  
8 Press '/" to select “SKIP”,  
then press \/| to select “ON” or  
“OFF”.  
Channel Setting  
This Recorder can receive a maximum of 84  
channels as shown below by presetting the  
channels into memory.  
• The SKIP function determines  
whether the channel can be selected  
when using the CH ' /" instead of  
the Number buttons.  
(UHF: E21 to E69)  
1 Press START MENU to display  
9 Press SET/ENTER to store this  
channel. The Recorder will incre-  
ment to the next channel up.  
• If any more channels are to be tuned  
in, repeat this procedure.  
the “START MENU” screen.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
2 Press '/"/\ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 2”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• Once all the channels have been  
tuned in. Press START MENU or  
EXIT to return to the normal screen.  
MODE SET T I NG  
MANUA L TUN I NG  
CHANNE L SORT  
CLOCK SET T I NG  
POS T CODE  
Channel Sort  
When your Recorder tunes in broadcast  
channels automatically, it sorts them into a  
standard order using internal information. You  
can change the order of the channel with the  
following procedure.  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
1 Press START MENU to display  
3 Press '/" to select “MANUAL  
TUNING”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
the “START MENU” screen.  
2 Press '/" /\ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 2”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
4 Press '/" to select “PRESET”,  
then press \ /| to choose the  
required preset channel.  
3 Press ' /" to select “CHANNEL  
SORT”, then press SET/ENTER.  
➛
PRESE T  
AAA  
8 4  
CH 2 5  
CHANNE L SORT  
CHANNE L  
F I NE TUN I NG  
DECODER  
SK I P  
MOVE  
CANCE L  
NAME  
ON  
ON  
OF F  
OF F  
4 Press '/" to select “MOVE”,  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
then press SET/ENTER.  
MOVE  
1 / 5  
5 Press '/" to select  
1CH5 0  
2 BBC 1  
3 BBC 2  
4 I T V  
7
8
9
1 3  
1 4  
1 5  
1 6  
“CHANNEL”, then press \ /| to  
start tuning in either direction.  
• If it is not the desired channel, press  
\/| to continue tuning.  
1 0  
5 Press '/" /\ /| to highlight the  
channel to be moved. Then press  
SET/ENTER.  
6 Press '/" to select “FINE  
TUNING”. Then press and hold \/  
| until the sharpest colour picture  
is obtained.  
6 Press '/" /\ /| to highlight the  
new position for the channel. Then  
press SET/ENTER.  
7 Press '/" to select “DE-  
CODER”. This is preset to “OFF”.  
If you connect a decoder, you  
must use \/| to turn the decoder  
function “ON”.  
MOVE  
1 / 5  
1 BBC 1  
2 BBC 2  
3 I TV  
4CH4  
5CH5 0  
6CH5  
7
8
9
1 0  
1 1  
1 2  
1 3  
1 4  
1 5  
1 6  
1 7  
1 8  
: S E L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Channel Setting  
7 If any more channels are to be  
moved, repeat the procedure from  
step 5 to 6.  
Re-naming Channels  
When your Recorder tunes in broadcast  
channels automatically, it names them using  
the VPS/PDC information. You can change the  
name of the channel with the following  
procedure.  
8 When all the channels are in your  
preferred order, either press  
RETURN to return to the “CHAN-  
NEL SORT” screen or press  
START MENU or EXIT to return  
to the normal screen.  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the “START MENU” screen.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
2 Press '/" /\ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 2”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
Deleting Channels  
If there is a channel you want to delete from  
the Recorder memory, follow the procedure  
below.  
3 Press ' /" to select “CHANNEL  
SORT”, then press SET/ENTER.  
1 Press START MENU to display  
4 Press ' /" to select “NAME”,  
the “START MENU” screen.  
then press SET/ENTER.  
2 Press '/"/\ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 2”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
5 Press '/" /\ /| to highlight the  
channel to be re-named. Then  
press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press ' /" to select “CHANNEL  
NAME  
1 / 5  
SORT”, then press SET/ENTER.  
1CH5 0  
2 BBC 1  
3 BBC 2  
4 I TV  
5CH4  
6CH5  
7
8
9
1 0  
1 1  
1 2  
1 3  
1 4  
1 5  
1 6  
1 7  
1 8  
4 Press '/" to select “CANCEL”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
5 Press '/"/\ /| to highlight the  
SE L ECT ED : CH5 0  
: SE L ECT  
channel to be cancelled.  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
: ENT ER  
CANCE L  
1 / 5  
1CH5 0  
2 BBC 1  
3 BBC 2  
4 I TV  
5CH4  
6CH5  
7
8
9
1 0  
1 1  
1 2  
1 3  
1 4  
1 5  
1 6  
1 7  
1 8  
6 To enter a new channel name use  
'/" to scroll through the  
characters and \/| to move to  
the next position. Then press  
SET/ENTER.  
: S E L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
7 If any more channels are to be re-  
named, repeat the procedure from  
step 5 to 6.  
6 Press SET/ENTER twice to  
cancel the channel.  
8 When all the channels are named  
correctly, either press RETURN  
to return to the “CHANNEL SORT”  
screen or press START MENU or  
EXIT to return to the normal  
screen.  
CANCE L  
1 / 5  
1 BBC 1  
2 BBC 2  
3 I TV  
4CH4  
5CH5  
6
7
8
9
1 0  
1 1  
1 2  
1 3  
1 4  
1 5  
1 6  
1 7  
1 8  
: S E L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
7 When all the channels you wish  
have been cancelled, either press  
RETURN to return to the “CHAN-  
NEL SORT” screen or press  
START MENU or EXIT to return  
to the normal screen.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Post Code  
Post Code Security  
Changing PIN NUMBER  
This feature should allow the Police to identify  
you as the owner of the Recorder if it is  
stolen. Each time the Recorder is turned on,  
your postcode will be displayed for 5  
seconds. Your postcode cannot be changed  
or removed without first entering the correct  
PIN-number. If you with to use this function,  
follow the procedure below.  
You can change your PIN number at any time  
with the following procedure.  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the “START MENU” screen.  
2 Press '/" /\ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 2”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
1 Press START MENU to display  
3 Press '/" to select “POST  
the “START MENU” screen.  
CODE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
2 Press '/"/\ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 2”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
4 Press the Number buttons or  
'/" to enter your current PIN  
number, then press SET/ENTER.  
5 Press \ to re-select PIN number.  
MODE SET T I NG  
MANUA L TUN I NG  
CHANNE L SORT  
CLOCK SET T I NG  
POS T CODE  
6 Enter your new PIN number. Press  
SET/ENTER to confirm, then  
press START MENU or EXIT to  
return to a normal screen.  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
NOTE  
3 Press '/" to select “POST  
• Your Postcode can be changed at any  
time, but you must first enter your correct  
PIN number. If the wrong PIN number is  
entered, an “ERROR” will appear. Re-enter  
the correct number.  
CODE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
4 Press the Number buttons or '/  
" to enter your desired PIN  
number.  
• This must be a 4 digit number in the  
range 0000 – 9999.  
5 After entering the PIN number,  
press | to highlight the first digit  
of “POST CODE”.  
6 To enter your post code press '/  
" to scroll through the charac-  
ters, then press \ /| to move to  
the next position.  
7 Press SET/ENTER to confirm.  
8 Write your PIN number in the box  
provided for future reference.  
Important!  
• Keep your Operation Manual separate  
from your Recorder.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Information  
2 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or HDD again.  
• The HDD information screen is  
displayed.  
Content of TV Screen  
Display  
When the power is turned on or the channel is  
switched.  
2
HDD  
1
OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
3
4
5
6
7
F I NE  
REMAIN 19h10  
m
L
R
PR  
2
BBC NICAM STEREO  
1
4
/
/
3 3  
6
:
12 3 4  
5
0 0  
0 0  
:
2 8  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Display automatically  
TITLE REPEAT  
disappears in 3 seconds.  
1 Original title playback/Play List play-  
back indicator  
2 Mode display  
• Playback:  
1 Preset channel  
REC  
• Recording:  
2 Channel name  
• Stop:  
3 NICAM signal reception  
4 Stereo/Bilingual (I/II) signal reception  
5 Audio output mode display  
3 Recording mode and remaining  
(recordable) time  
4 Current title number/Total number of  
titles  
5 Current chapter number/Total number of  
chapters  
Monitor Output when Re-  
6 Counter  
ceiving a Stereo or Bilingual  
7 Repeat Playback indicator  
Broadcast  
When receiving a stereo or bilingual  
broadcast, press AUDIO to change the audio  
output mode to select Monitor Output. See  
the table on page 96 for details.  
3 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or HDD again.  
• The screen changes to the counter  
display.  
NOTE  
HDD  
• When the signal is weak (hard to hear) in a  
stereo broadcast, press AUDIO to turn off  
“L R” display on the TV screen and change  
the audio output mode to MONO.  
ORIGINAL  
0
0
:
0
0
:
5
1
4 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or HDD again.  
• Display is turned off.  
Checking the Channel,  
Remaining Time of HDD  
and Number of Titles  
When HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder is lit (HDD mode)  
NOTE  
• The HDD information screen (step 2) will  
automatically disappear in 1 minute.  
• The counter display (step 3) will not  
disappear automatically. Press ON  
SCREEN (under the cover) or HDD to turn  
it off.  
1 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or HDD.  
• Channel information is displayed.  
L
R
PR  
2
BBC NICAM STEREO  
• The channel information display will  
automatically turn off in 5 seconds.  
NOTE  
• The channel information cannot be viewed  
during playback, Time Shift Viewing,  
Chasing Playback, or Simultaneous  
Recording.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Information  
NOTE  
Checking the Channel,  
Remaining Time of DVD  
and Number of Titles  
• The DVD information screen (step 2) will  
automatically disappear in 1 minute.  
The counter display (step 3) will not  
disappear automatically. Press ON SCREEN  
(under the cover) or DVD to turn it off.  
•
When DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder is lit (DVD mode)  
Switching Front Panel  
Display  
+
VIDEO Plus  
1 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or DVD.  
• Channel information is displayed.  
• The channel information display will  
automatically turn off in 5 seconds.  
2 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or DVD again  
Front panel display  
• The DVD information screen is  
displayed.  
1 Turn the power on.  
• Channel display (when watching TV)  
2
DVD-RW  
1
VR OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
3
4
5
6
7
F I NE  
REMAIN 0h49m  
1
1
/
/
7
1
• Counter display (during playback/  
recording)  
0 0 : 0 0 : 1 2  
TITLE REPEAT  
1 Disc type, recording format, original title  
playback/Play List playback indicators  
2 Mode display  
Hour Minute Second  
• Playback:  
REC  
• Recording:  
• Stop:  
2
Press DISPLAY (under the cover).  
• Remaining time display (when  
watching TV)  
3 Recording mode and remaining  
(recordable) time  
• “FINALIZED” indicator when a  
finalized disc is played back.  
4 Current title number/Total number of  
titles  
• Total number of titles (Stop mode)  
• Title number currently played back  
(Playback mode)  
• Title number currently recorded  
(Recording mode)  
Hour  
Minute  
• Current title number and chapter  
number (during playback)  
5 Current chapter number/Total number of  
chapters  
• Total number of chapters (Stop mode)  
• Chapter number currently played  
back (Playback mode)  
• Chapter number currently recorded  
(Recording mode)  
Current title Current chapter  
• Channel currently recorded (during  
recording)  
6 Counter  
7 Repeat Playback indicator  
3 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or DVD again.  
• The screen changes to the counter  
display.  
3 Press DISPLAY (under the  
cover) again.  
DVD-RW  
VR OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
• The screen returns to the display in  
step 1.  
0 0 : 0 0 : 2 6  
NOTE  
4 Press ON SCREEN (under the  
cover) or DVD again.  
•
Because of technical reasons the time counter  
is rounding up or down during the time  
counting process. Therefore small deviations  
of the time display are normal.  
• Display is turned off.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preparation to Operate This Recorder  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD VIDEO  
VIDEO CD  
AUDIO CD  
CD-R  
MP3  
CD-RW  
MP3  
Buttons used for this operation.  
Buttons with the same name on the Recorder and  
remote control will perform the same operation.  
Buttons on Remote Control  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Buttons on Recorder  
4
Operating HDD  
1
2
3
Turn on the power of TV.  
Press  
.
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up, and HDD  
operation is enabled.  
Operating DVD  
Press  
.
Switch TV input to the AV  
input used to connect to the  
Recorder.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up, and DVD  
operation is enabled.  
Recording and Playback  
• Refer to pages 36 to 66 for details  
about recording and playback.  
Press  
to turn the  
Recorder on.  
• TV broadcast will be displayed.  
NOTE  
• After turning on power, both the HDD and DVD buttons  
on the front of the Recorder will blink for a moment while  
the Recorder is getting ready. Perform this operation  
after the HDD button lights up.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback  
With this Recorder, you can enjoy Time Shift Viewing and Chasing Playback—distinctive features of a HDD.  
1 Time Shift Viewing  
2 Chasing Playback  
While you are watching a programme, the phone rings.... At  
times like this, you can pause the programme at the press of  
a button and watch the rest later.  
You return home earlier than expected while timer recording  
is in progress.... At times like this, you can watch the  
programme from the beginning without having to wait for the  
recording to finish.  
NOTE  
Chasing Playback (Pause➔Play)  
Press |PLAY during recording or timer recording to watch  
the recorded programme from the beginning.  
• Some programmes may not allow you to time shift view  
due to copyright of the programmes.  
• Programmes recorded for Time Shift Viewing will be  
erased automatically if Time Shift Viewing is cancelled.  
Current  
scene (live)  
Recording  
Recording continues  
Time Shift Viewing (Pause)  
You can pause during sudden phone call or when you want  
to take a note. In such cases press TIME SHIFT to pause.  
Press |PLAY to watch the rest of the programme.  
Current  
scene (live)  
Pause  
scene  
Playback from beginning  
Time shift recording  
Press |PLAY.  
Playback starts from the beginning of the  
programme. (Recording continues)  
Press  
TIME SHIFT.  
Press |PLAY.  
Press I STOP/LIVE to return to the current (live) broadcast.  
(Time shift recording stops at this point. Recorded  
programmes will be erased automatically.)  
NOTE  
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback  
If you press G REV or J FWD during Time Shift  
Viewing or Chasing Playback, Fast Reverse/Forward  
Playback starts.  
If you press G REV (or J FWD) again, the speed of  
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback changes as shown below.  
(You cannot listen to audio during Fast Reverse/Forward  
Playback.)  
• When remaining capacity of HDD during Time Shift  
Viewing is gone, Time Shift Viewing will be cancelled. The  
current (live) broadcast will be displayed and the  
programmes recorded for Time Shift Viewing will be  
erased. You cannot view the recorded part of the  
programme.  
• A message will be displayed 5 minutes before timer  
recording starts. If you are time shift viewing, it will stop 3  
minutes later.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
NOTE  
• If you perform Fast Forward Playback during Time Shift  
Viewing or Chasing Playback, the Recorder will automati-  
cally switch to the playback screen when Fast Forward  
Playback reaches about 30 seconds before the live  
broadcast. The timing that goes automatically back to  
playback mode will slightly differ depending on the speed  
of Fast Forward and Recording Mode.  
• When the unit automatically goes back to normal  
Playback during  
, you can still view the programme in  
Fast Forward Playback up to the point of the live broad-  
cast by performing or  
.
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback  
Time Shift Viewing  
HDD  
Chasing Playback  
HDD  
1 Press TIME SHIFT while  
1 Press |PLAY during recording.  
• Playback starts from the beginning of  
the programme being recorded.  
(Chasing Playback)  
viewing a programme.  
• Pause screen will be displayed in a  
few seconds.  
• Press FSTILL/PAUSE to pause  
playback (Still Playback).  
To cancel Still Playback, press  
FSTILL/PAUSE or |PLAY.  
Pause icon  
(This will become a square icon during  
Time Shift Viewing.)  
+
VIDEO Plus  
2 Press G REV or J FWD  
• Press I STOP/LIVE to return to  
during Chasing Playback.  
• Each time you press the buttons, the  
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback  
speed changes as shown below.  
current (live) broadcast.  
2 Press |PLAY.  
• Playback starts from the position you  
paused.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
Play icon  
Example: When J FWD is pressed  
once  
• Press FSTILL/PAUSE to pause  
playback (Still Playback).  
To cancel Still Playback, press  
FSTILL/PAUSE or |PLAY.  
Fast Forward Playback 2✕ icon  
3 Press G REV or J FWD  
• Press |PLAY to return to the normal  
during Time Shift Viewing.  
• Each time you press the buttons, the  
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback  
speed changes as shown below.  
playback speed.  
3 Press ISTOP/LIVE to return to  
the live broadcast which is being  
recorded.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
Example: When J FWD is pressed  
once  
Fast Forward Playback 2✕ icon  
• Press |PLAY to return to the normal  
playback speed.  
4 Press ISTOP/LIVE to return to  
the current (live) broadcast.  
• Time Shift Viewing will be cancelled,  
and the automatically recorded  
content will be erased.  
NOTE  
• Time shift viewing will stop in the following  
cases.  
• TIME SHIFT or I STOP/LIVE is  
pressed.  
• HDD remaining capacity is gone.  
• The broadcast whose recording is  
prohibited is received.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording to HDD  
Recording Programmes to  
HDD for High Speed Dub-  
bing from HDD to DVD-RW/R  
in Video Mode  
This section explains recording on the  
hard disc (HDD). (For information on  
recording to DVD, see page 38.)  
Confirming Remaining Time  
for Recording  
• High Speed Dubbing Priority  
Normally, recording onto HDD is done  
using own format, but recording can also  
be done using a format for high speed  
dubbing onto DVDs formatted in Video  
mode.  
To perform high speed dubbing onto a  
DVD in Video mode, set “HI SP DUB  
PRIORITY” to “YES” and then record. (See  
page 48.)  
To confirm on TV screen  
• Press ON SCREEN (under the cover).  
To confirm on front display panel  
• Press DISPLAY (under the cover).  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Confirming Remaining Time  
HDD  
OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
This display means  
that you can record  
20 hours more in  
FINE mode.  
F I NE  
REMAIN 20h0m  
1
1
0
0
0
0
:
0 0  
:
0 0  
Chasing Playback (page 35)  
• This lets you playback and watch a  
programme from the beginning while it is  
being recorded on HDD.  
• During live programme viewing or HDD  
playback, remaining time of recording in  
the selected recording mode will be  
displayed.  
Simultaneous Recording/  
Playback (page 66)  
• This lets you playback and watch a  
programme recorded on HDD, or a DVD or  
CD, while recording another programme on  
HDD.  
• During HDD recording, remaining time of  
recording in the currently selected  
recording mode will be displayed.  
Guide to Recordable Length  
of Time  
Cutting out Commercials  
Recording Mode  
(pages 70, 81)  
• After recording is finished, you can cut out  
commercials and other unnecessary  
scenes by calling up the Erase Scene  
function.  
Recording mode  
FINE SP  
LP  
EP  
Recording time  
(DV-HR350H)  
Recording time  
(DV-HR300H)  
30 hr 50 hr 100 hr 150 hr  
20 hr 33 hr 67 hr 100 hr  
(Commercials cannot be cut out automati-  
cally during recording.)  
• Remaining time for recording differs  
according to the recording mode.  
• Recordable time might be less than above  
figures depending on the programme to be  
recorded.  
• MN (manual) recording mode setting  
allows you to select the picture quality from  
among 32 levels on the “MANUAL REC.  
MODE” screen (page 40).  
Tamper Proof  
• You can set Tamper Proof to prevent  
operations by mistake during recording or  
timer recording.  
1 Press and hold TAMPER PROOF (ON  
SCREEN and DISPLAY together) for  
more than 2 seconds.  
2 Each time you perform this operation,  
the function is activated or deactivated.  
• If you try to operate the Recorder while  
Tamper Proof is set, “  
display panel and tells you that Tamper  
Proof is set.  
Monitoring a Programme  
” blinks in the front  
Being Recorded while Play-  
ing Back a Disc (page 66)  
• Picture in picture  
Information  
This lets you monitor a programme being  
recorded, while playing back a disc, using  
the Simultaneous Recording/Playback  
function.  
• When there is a report message (e.g. when  
a timer recording was not successfully  
performed), the Recorder displays an on-  
screen message telling that there is a  
report message.  
Dubbing (page 47)  
Check the report message by selecting  
“INFORMATION” on the START MENU.  
• Titles recorded on HDD can be saved by  
dubbing them to DVD-RW/R. (You can also  
dub from DVD-RW/R to HDD.)  
• You can batch dub up to 5 programmes.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording to HDD  
REC PAUSE icon  
Direct Recording to HDD  
HDD  
Explained below is the standard procedure  
for recording the programme being viewed  
onto HDD.  
• A maximum of 12 hours can be recorded  
onto HDD in one direct recording session.  
• A maximum of 199 programmes can be  
recorded (saved) onto HDD.  
6 Press REC PAUSE to resume  
recording.  
7 Press REC STOP to stop record-  
ing.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
• “DATA IS BEING RECORDED TO  
DISC.” displays on TV screen and  
recording stops.  
NOTE  
• The content being recorded will not be  
recorded if power failure occurs or if power  
cord is accidentally unplugged.  
* Also direct recording to a DVD-RW/R is  
possible (page 38).  
NOTE  
•
Data is still written to the disc after recording  
is stopped, and so you may be unable to  
start the next recording immediately.  
Preparation for Direct Recording  
• When you record NICAM broadcast, set  
“NICAM” setting to “AUTO” (see page 95).  
• When recording to the HDD, the recorded  
data is the same as that recorded to a  
DVD-RW in VR mode.  
• You cannot record programmes whose  
recording is prohibited.  
• Timer recording cannot be performed  
during direct recording. To perform timer  
recording, stop direct recording before the  
preset time for timer recording.  
1 Press HDD to select HDD mode.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
Inserting Chapter Marks  
• HDD mode is selected automatically  
when the power is turned on.  
Manually during Recording  
Press CHAPTER MARK (under the cover).  
• “RECORDED CHAPTER MARK. ” is  
displayed and chapter mark will be  
inserted.  
2 Press the Number buttons or  
CH'/"to select the channel to  
be recorded.  
• You cannot insert chapter marks during  
Simultaneous Recording/Playback.  
3 Press REC MODE to select the  
recording mode.  
• The recording mode changes as  
shown below each time the button is  
pressed.  
Setting the Record End  
Time during Direct  
Recording (Simple  
FINE SP LP EP MNgg  
Recording Timer)  
• Recording mode set by selecting  
“MNgg” is the recording mode set  
on the “MANUAL REC. MODE” Select  
screen (page 41).  
HDD  
1 Press ÆREC on the remote  
control during recording.  
• The “SET STOP TIME” screen is  
displayed.  
4 Press ÆREC during broadcast  
viewing.  
• Recording begins and REC icon  
displays in TV screen.  
2 Press '/" to set the end time.  
• The end time can be set in units of 15  
minutes.  
•
REC indicator (for HDD) on the front of  
Recorder is lit red during recording.  
REC icon  
• Total recording time cannot exceed  
12 hours so the end time has to be  
set accordingly.  
• Press EXIT to stop setting midway  
through.  
HDD  
REC  
OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
F I NE  
REMAIN 19h8m  
1
1
0
/
/
0
1
1
:
1 9  
:
3 0  
SET STOP TIME.  
5 Press REC PAUSE to pause  
recording.  
STOP TIME 10 :  
30  
• Record Pause does not work during  
Chasing Playback.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
• During pause, the REC indicator (for  
HDD) on the front of the Recorder  
blinks.  
3 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The record end time is set, and the  
Simple Recording Timer indicator  
(clock mark) lights up on the front  
display panel.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording to DVD  
This section explains recording on the  
DVD (For information on recording to  
HDD, see page 36.)  
Tamper Proof  
• You can set Tamper Proof to prevent  
operations by mistake during recording or  
timer recording.  
1 Press and hold TAMPER PROOF (ON  
SCREEN and DISPLAY together) for  
more than 2 seconds.  
Checking Remaining Time  
and Other Information  
Press ON SCREEN (under the cover) during  
DVD playback or recording.  
2 Each time you perform this operation,  
the function is activated or deactivated.  
• If you try to operate the Recorder while  
+
VIDEO Plus  
• Disc capacity and the number of recorded  
titles, etc. are displayed. It is recom-  
mended to confirm before recording.  
Tamper Proof is set, “  
” blinks in the front  
display panel and tells you that Tamper  
Proof is set.  
DVD-RW  
VR OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
Loading Disc  
Disc capacity  
Number of titles  
F I NE  
REMAIN 0h30m  
2
1 0  
1 Press OPERATE to turn the  
power on.  
Number of  
chapters  
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0  
2 Press OPEN/CLOSE on the  
Recorder to open the disc tray.  
• “REMAIN 0h0m” or nothing will be  
displayed when an unrecordable disc is  
set.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
OPERATE  
NOTE  
• Disc remaining time display is approximate  
measure of disc capacity. There may be  
space left in disc capacity after recording.  
(Remaining time during recording and after  
recording might not be the same.)  
3 Load disc on the disc tray.  
Simultaneous Recording/  
Playback (page 66)  
• HDD playback is possible while recording  
or timer recording to DVD.  
OPER  
ATE  
• Insert the disc with the label face up.  
• In case of disc recorded on both  
sides, face the side you want to  
record down.  
Dubbing (page 47)  
• Dubbing titles recorded on DVD to HDD or  
titles recorded on HDD to DVD-RW/R are  
possible.  
• Exact Dubbing: Automatically selects the  
appropriate recording mode according to  
the remaining capacity of DVD when  
dubbing titles recorded on HDD to DVD.  
4 Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the  
disc tray.  
Direct Recording to DVD  
Not Enough Disc Capacity  
• Exact Recording (page 87)  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
Exact recording functions when the  
selected recording mode is not appropriate  
to fit the programme to the disc when you  
timer record.  
• Alternate Recording (page 92)  
Alternate recording functions when you  
forget to load a DVD for timer recording. It  
automatically timer records the programme  
to HDD.  
Explained below is the standard procedure  
for recording the programme being viewed  
onto DVD.  
• You can create a maximum of 99 original  
titles.  
• Record in VR mode when you want to edit  
later. Edit functions will be limited when you  
record in Video mode.  
Preparation for Direct Recording  
• When you record NICAM broadcast, set  
“NICAM” setting to “AUTO” (see page 95).  
Cutting TV Commercials  
(page 70)  
• You can cut unwanted scenes like TV  
commercials by using the ERASE SCENE  
function after the recording. (Cannot cut TV  
commercials automatically.)  
• You cannot cut scenes when you record  
programmes by Video mode to DVD-RW or  
DVD-R.  
1 Press DVD to select DVD mode.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
• When the power is turned on, HDD  
mode is selected automatically.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording to DVD  
2 Set a DVD-RW or DVD-R disc.  
• When a new DVD-RW disc not  
initialized yet is set, VR mode  
initializing starts automatically. When  
initializing is over, you can start  
recording.  
NOTE  
•
Data is still written to the disc after recording  
is stopped, and so you may be unable to  
start the next recording immediately.  
• Press ON SCREEN (under the cover) to  
confirm remaining time of DVD or check  
the counter display during recording.  
• You cannot record programmes which  
prohibit recording.  
• When you want to re-initialize in Video  
mode, select “DVD VIDEO MODE  
INIT.” screen (page 99).  
• When you want to initialize in Video  
mode from the beginning, select  
“AUTO INITIALIZING” screen (page  
99).  
• Recording either stops or pauses automati-  
cally in the following cases.  
—Programme which prohibits recording is  
on air.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
—Unable to continue recording for some  
reason.  
• Timer recording cannot be performed  
during direct recording. To perform timer  
recording, stop direct recording before the  
preset time for timer recording.  
3 Press Number buttons or CH '/  
" to select the channel to record.  
4 Press REC MODE to select the  
desired recording mode.  
• The recording mode changes as  
shown below each time the button is  
pressed.  
You may not be able to record on disc  
edited by other recorder.  
• If a disc edited by other DVD recorder has  
more than 999 chapter marks, it cannot be  
edited (or recorded) with this Recorder.  
• If a disc edited by other DVD recorder has  
added or erased scenes 51 times or more  
per title or the disc is protected, it cannot  
be edited (or recorded) with this Recorder.  
About Recording to DVD in Video Mode  
• In case you are recording to DVD in Video  
mode and recording stops due to power  
failure etc., recorded contents a few  
minutes before the stop may not be  
recorded.  
FINE SP LP EP MNgg  
• Recording mode set when “MNgg”  
is selected is the recording mode set  
on the “MANUAL REC. MODE”  
screen (page 41).  
5 Press G REC.  
• Recording begins and REC icon is  
displayed.  
• The REC indicator (for DVD) on the  
front of the Recorder is lit red during  
recording.  
• For details on limitation during recording in  
Video mode, see page 48 too.  
DVD-RW  
VR OR  
Inserting Chapter Marks  
Manually during Recording  
Press CHAPTER MARK (under the cover).  
• “RECORDED CHAPTER MARK.” displays  
and chapter mark is recorded.  
• You can only record chapter marks  
manually when recording to DVD-RW (VR  
mode).  
REC  
I
G
I
N
AL  
F I NE  
REMAIN 1h0m  
1
1
0
/
/
0
1
1
:
0 0  
:
0 1  
6 Press REC PAUSE to pause  
recording.  
• You cannot record chapter marks manually  
when recording to DVD-RW (Video mode)  
or DVD-R, or during Simultaneous Record-  
ing/Playback.  
• Pause will not function during timer  
recording.  
• The REC indicator (for DVD) on the  
front of the Recorder blinks during  
Recording Pause mode.  
Setting Record End Time  
during Direct Recording  
• You can set record end time during direct  
recording to DVD. For details see “Setting  
the Record End Time during Direct  
Recording (Simple Recording Timer)” on  
page 37.  
7 Press REC PAUSE to resume  
recording.  
8 Press REC STOP to stop  
recording.  
• “DATA IS BEING RECORDED TO  
DISC.” displays on TV screen and  
recording stops.  
• Stop recording first when you take out  
the disc.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Recording Mode (HDD/DVD)  
• HDD recording time is approximate measure. DVD recording time is approximate measure using 4.7GB disc.  
•
This does not guarantee the length of recording time. Actual recording time may be shorter than that indicated below depending  
on image quality and other aspects.  
HDD Recording Mode and  
Recording Time  
HDD  
DVD-RW/R Recording Mode  
and Recording Time  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
DV-HR350H  
DV-HR300H  
Recording Recording  
Mode Time (approx.)  
Recording Recording  
Mode Time (approx.)  
Recording Recording  
Mode Time (approx.)  
EP MN1  
MN2  
Recording Recording  
Mode Time (approx.)  
150 Hr EP MN1 100 Hr  
MN1  
MN2  
MN3  
MN4  
MN5  
MN6  
MN7  
MN8  
MN9  
360 Min  
345 Min  
330 Min  
315 Min  
300 Min  
285 Min  
270 Min  
255 Min  
240 Min  
MN1  
MN2  
MN3  
MN4  
MN5  
MN6  
MN7  
MN8  
MN9  
360 Min  
345 Min  
330 Min  
315 Min  
300 Min  
285 Min  
270 Min  
255 Min  
240 Min  
EP  
144 Hr  
137 Hr  
131 Hr  
125 Hr  
119 Hr  
112 Hr  
106 Hr  
MN2  
MN3  
MN4  
MN5  
MN6  
MN7  
MN8  
96 Hr  
91 Hr  
87 Hr  
83 Hr  
79 Hr  
75 Hr  
71 Hr  
67 Hr  
64 Hr  
61 Hr  
58 Hr  
55 Hr  
53 Hr  
50 Hr  
47 Hr  
44 Hr  
42 Hr  
39 Hr  
36 Hr  
33 Hr  
32 Hr  
30 Hr  
29 Hr  
28 Hr  
26 Hr  
25 Hr  
24 Hr  
23 Hr  
22 Hr  
21 Hr  
20 Hr  
MN3  
MN4  
MN5  
MN6  
MN7  
MN8  
LP  
LP MN9  
MN10  
MN11  
MN12  
MN13  
MN14  
MN15  
MN16  
MN17  
MN18  
MN19  
MN20  
100 Hr LP MN9  
MN10 230 Min  
MN11 220 Min  
MN12 210 Min  
MN13 200 Min  
MN14 190 Min  
MN15 180 Min  
MN16 170 Min  
MN17 160 Min  
MN18 150 Min  
MN19 140 Min  
MN20 130 Min  
MN10 230 Min  
MN11 220 Min  
MN12 210 Min  
MN13 200 Min  
MN14 190 Min  
MN15 180 Min  
MN16 170 Min  
MN17 160 Min  
MN18 150 Min  
MN19 140 Min  
MN20 130 Min  
96 Hr  
92 Hr  
88 Hr  
83 Hr  
79 Hr  
75 Hr  
71 Hr  
67 Hr  
63 Hr  
58 Hr  
54 Hr  
50 Hr  
48 Hr  
46 Hr  
44 Hr  
42 Hr  
40 Hr  
38 Hr  
35 Hr  
34 Hr  
33 Hr  
32 Hr  
30 Hr  
MN10  
MN11  
MN12  
MN13  
MN14  
MN15  
MN16  
MN17  
MN18  
MN19  
MN20  
MN21  
MN22  
MN23  
MN24  
MN25  
MN26  
MN27  
MN28  
MN29  
MN30  
MN31  
MN32  
MN21 120 Min SP MN21 120 Min  
MN21  
MN22  
MN23  
MN24  
MN25  
MN26  
MN27  
MN28  
MN29  
MN30  
MN31  
MN32  
SP  
SP  
MN22 110 Min  
MN23 105 Min  
MN24 100 Min  
MN22 110 Min  
MN23 105 Min  
MN24 100 Min  
MN25  
MN26  
MN27  
MN28  
MN29  
MN30  
MN31  
MN32  
95 Min  
90 Min  
85 Min  
80 Min  
75 Min  
70 Min  
65 Min  
MN25  
MN26  
MN27  
MN28  
MN29  
MN30  
MN31  
95 Min  
90 Min  
85 Min  
80 Min  
75 Min  
70 Min  
65 Min  
60 Min  
60 Min FINE MN32  
FINE  
FINE  
NOTE  
• Higher recording mode means higher picture quality and lower recording mode means longer recording time.  
• Picture quality of recorded content changes distinctively if the recording mode changes from the recording modes right  
below the bold lines in left chart and recording modes right above the bold lines. The positions of the bold lines differ  
among HDD, DVD-RW (VR Mode) and DVD-RW/R (Video Mode).  
•
With MN22-32, VBR recording has a large effect, so the actual recording time will be longer.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Recording Mode (HDD/DVD)  
Direct Recording the TV  
programme you are  
watching  
Setting the Manual  
Recording Mode (MN)  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
You can set the manual recording mode  
which is used when you select “MN XX” with  
REC MODE.  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
Important!  
• This function is available only when  
connecting to your TV using SCART  
cable.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the “START MENU” screen.  
2 Press ' /"/ \ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 1”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
You can record the TV programme you are  
watching with easy operation.  
1 Press DVD or HDD to select the  
3 Press \ /| to select “REC.  
recording disc.  
FUNCTION”.  
2 Press DIRECT REC TV (under  
4 Press ' /" to select “MANUAL  
REC. MODE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
the cover) to start recording.  
3 Press REC STOP to stop record-  
ing.  
OTHER SETTINGS 1[REC. FUNCTION ]  
25/12 10:28  
REC. FUNCTION  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
AUTO CHAPTER  
EXACT RECORDING  
REC . AUDIO FORMAT  
EXTERNAL AUDIO  
VIDEO MODE AUDIO  
MANUAL REC. MODE  
5 Press \ /| to select the desired  
recording mode, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• Refer to the table on page 40.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS 1 MANUAL REC. MODE  
25/12 10:28  
ABLE TO SELECT 1 OF 32 LEVELS OF PICTURE QUALITY IN  
MANUAL REC. MODE WHEN USING RECORDING MODE SWITCH.  
EP  
LP  
SP  
FINE  
NOTE  
When playing back a DVD-RW/R disc  
(Video Mode) recorded with the recorder  
using a DVD player.  
• When you playback a disc recorded with  
the manual mode of the recorder using a  
DVD player, it may not be able to playback  
depending on the model (some particular  
modes cannot be played back).  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording  
NOTE  
Timer Recording with  
• “ERROR” will appear if you have entered a  
number that is not a correct PlusCode  
number. If this happens press ERASE to  
delete the numbers as required and enter  
the correct PlusCode number.  
• Check that the menu list agrees with the  
times shown in the TV listing. If it does not,  
press ERASE to return to the VIDEO Plus+  
system menu, then enter the correct VIDEO  
Plus+ number.  
VIDEO Plus+® system  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
The operation method is the same for both  
HDD and DVD.  
•
The VIDEO Plus+® system allows you to  
programme your Recorder for timer recording  
simply by inputting the PlusCode number.  
The PlusCode numbers are listed in most  
newspapers, television guides, and local  
CATV listings. Simply by inputting this  
PlusCode number, you can program your  
Recorder for timer recording, eliminating the  
need to input programme start time, stop  
time, channel, date and other information  
usually necessary for timer recording.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
•
The first time that you use the VIDEO  
Plus+ system to make a recording on  
each channel preset, “PR” may be  
highlighted on the On-Screen Display.  
5 Enter the channel button you want  
to record using ' /" or Number  
buttons.  
• Up to 16 timer programs can be stored.  
(This includes Timer Program.)  
• For Example to record a programme  
on channel 8 press 0 8.  
Preparation to Use VIDEO Plus+ system  
• Check that the clock is displaying the  
correct time.  
• If the TIMER indicator on the front of the  
Recorder is lit, press TIMER ON/OFF to  
turn off the TIMER indicator and to set the  
TIMER STANDBY mode to off.  
6 Press \/| to select “START  
(time)” / “STOP (time)” then use  
'/" or the Number buttons to  
change the time if necessary.  
• When entering less than 10 hours or  
minutes add a “0” before the number, for  
example for 12:05 start, press 1 2 0 5.  
1 Press VIDEO Plus+ (button) to  
display the “VIDEO Plus+” setting  
screen.  
7 Press | to select “REC. MODE”,  
then use \/| to select the  
recording mode.  
+
V I DEO P LUS  
P L USCODE NO .  
ONCE WEEK L Y DA I L Y  
SYS T EM  
©
-
©REC . MODE  
F : F I NE S : SP L : L P E : EP  
M : MANUA L ( 1 3 2 )  
VPS / PDC  
©
1 6  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
0
9
: I NPUT  
: RE T URN  
: ON  
REC . MED I A  
H : HDD D : DVD  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
-
: OF F  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
2 Press Number buttons to enter  
the PlusCode number.  
• Press ERASE if you make a mistake  
in the PlusCode number. Each time  
you press the button, one digit will be  
erased.  
When “M:MANUAL (1~32)” is  
selected:  
• Select the recording mode with \/|,  
then press SET/ENTER. (The  
recording mode can be selected from  
32 levels.)  
3 Press " , then use \ /| to select  
“ONCE”, “WEEKLY” or “DAILY”.  
• If you want to make additional  
recordings at the same time each day  
or week, select “DAILY” or “WEEKLY”  
as appropriate.  
8 Press '/" to select “VPS/PDC”,  
then use \/| to turn the VPS/  
PDC setting ON(“∗”)/OFF(“-”).  
4 Press SET/ENTER to confirm.  
1 / 4  
DAT E  
2 5 / 1 2W  
PR START STOP  
1 2 : 3 5 1 3 : 0 5  
--  
F
H
--  
--  
--  
/
/
/
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
:
:
:
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
:
:
:
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
PR  
: PRESET  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording  
•
•
•
You can also access the VIDEO Plus+ system  
menu by performing the following procedure:  
1 Press START MENU.  
2 Press ' /" / \/| to select “TIMER  
PROGRAM/CHECK”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
3 Press ' /" to select “VIDEO Plus+”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
9 Press '/" to select “REC.  
MEDIA”, then use \/| to select  
the recording disc (“H:HDD” or  
“D:DVD”).  
10 Press SET/ENTER to confirm.  
4 Continue from step 1 of this procedure.  
5 Press START MENU or EXIT to exit from  
timer recording.  
VPS/PDC is a signal broadcast by some TV  
stations which adjusts the start and stop time  
of your Recorder recording. This ensures that  
if there is a change in broadcast time for your  
programme the Recorder will still record the  
whole programme.  
It is essential that the start time as it appears  
in the TV listing is used to programme the  
Recorder, as this information is used to  
identify the VPS/PDC signal corresponding to  
your programme.  
Even if recording by timer programming is  
completed, since the Recorder is VPS/PDC  
system compatible, the power may remain  
on internally (blue background output, LCD  
backlight off), but it will be turned off around  
4 AM the next day or three hours after  
recording is complete.  
1 / 4  
DAT E  
2 5 / 1 2W  
PR START STOP  
1 2 : 0 5 1 3 : 0 5  
+
VIDEO Plus  
8
S
D
--  
--  
--  
/
/
/
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
:
:
:
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
:
:
:
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: CHANGE  
: RE TURN  
11 Press SET/ENTER.  
+
V I DEO P LUS  
SYS T EM  
©
P L USCODE NO .  
-
ONCE WEEK L Y DA I L Y  
• Data is still written to the disc after first  
timer recording is stopped, the first part of  
the next programme may not be recorded.  
• During recording, press REC STOP to  
cancel the recording. If there are further  
recordings to be made, the Recorder will  
not return to TIMER STANDBY mode.  
• When you set a DVD as recording media,  
timer recording will not start during disc  
playback. If “ALTERNATE RECORDING” is  
set to “YES”, the programme will be timer  
recorded to HDD.  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
0
9
: I NPUT  
: RE T URN  
• The “VIDEO Plus+” screen is  
displayed. If you want to enter further  
VIDEO Plus+ system recordings  
repeat this procedure.  
12 When you have completed enter-  
ing the timer settings, press  
START MENU or EXIT to exit  
from the “VIDEO Plus+” screen.  
•
•
Timer recording will not start during dubbing.  
Manual recording and editing cannot be  
performed during timer standby.  
Convenient Functions When Recording to  
DVD  
13 (When you select “D:DVD” in step  
9, ensure the recordable DVD-RW/  
R is inserted into the Recorder)  
Press TIMER ON/OFF to place  
the Recorder in TIMER STANDBY  
mode.  
Exact Recording (page 87)  
• If you set EXACT RECORDING to “YES”,  
the Recorder will automatically adjust the  
recording mode of timer recording so the  
recorded programs will fit on one disc.  
Alternate Recording (page 92)  
• You can record timer programs to HDD  
automatically when Exact Recording  
cannot fit the programmes on one disc.  
• Alternate Recording will also function when  
you forgot to insert the disc for recording.  
• The TIMER indicator on the front of  
the Recorder lights up.  
OPERATE  
To check, change or cancel  
• The channel cannot be changed  
during TIMER STANDBY mode. To  
change the channel, set TIMER  
STANDBY to off.  
timer settings  
• See page 46.  
To stop recording while timer  
recording is in progress  
• If you press REC STOP, “TIMER RE-  
CORDING IS IN PROGRESS, IF YOU  
PRESS THE REC. STOP BUTTON ONCE  
MORE, TIMER RECORDING, CANCELS  
AND RECORDING STOPS,” will appear  
on the screen. Even that message goes  
out of the screen, pressing REC STOP  
one more time will stop the recording.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording  
4 Press SET/ENTER to display  
Timer Recording by  
today’s date.  
Specifying Date, Time  
and Channel  
1 / 4  
DAT E  
PR START STOP  
2 5 / 1 2  
-- - -- -  
:
:
:
:
--  
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
F
H
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
--  
--  
--  
/
/
/
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
:
:
:
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
The operation method is the same for both  
HDD and DVD.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
DAT E : DAY / MONTH  
: SE L ECT  
• You can timer record up to 16 programmes  
scheduled within a year, including VIDEO  
Plus+ system.  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
: ENT ER  
• You can consecutively record up to 12  
hours to HDD.  
• Press '/" or Number buttons to  
change the date if you want.  
• If you use the Number buttons, enter  
two digits for the day, then two for the  
month. For example for December  
25th, press 2 5 (25th), then 1 2  
(December).  
Preparation for Timer Recording  
• Check that the clock is displaying the  
correct time.  
• If the TIMER indicator on the front of the  
Recorder is lit, press TIMER ON/OFF to  
turn off the TIMER indicator and to set the  
TIMER STANDBY mode to off.  
5 When the correct date for your  
recording is shown, press | to  
move to the next setting.  
For Example: Recording a programme  
on channel 8 from 12:05 to 13:05 on  
December 25th.  
1 / 4  
DAT E  
PR START STOP  
2 5 / 1 2  
-- -  
:
:
:
:
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
:
:
:
:
--  
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
F
H
--  
--  
--  
/
/
/
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the “START MENU” screen.  
: ONCE  
W
: WEEK L Y  
D : DA I L Y  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
2 Press '/"/ \ /| to select  
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
6 If you want to make additional  
recordings at the same time each  
day or week, press '/" to select  
“D” (DAILY) or “W” (WEEKLY).  
Then press | to move to the next  
setting.  
+
V I DEOP LUS  
T I MER  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
7 Press '/" or the Number  
buttons to enter the channel  
number. Then press | to move to  
the next setting.  
3 Press '/" to select “TIMER”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• For example to record a programme  
on channel 8, press 0 8.  
1 / 4  
8 Press '/" or the Number  
buttons to enter the start time,  
hours first, then minutes, then  
press |.  
DAT E  
PR START STOP  
--  
--  
--  
--  
/
/
/
/
-- -- - -- -  
:
:
:
:
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
:
:
:
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
• When entering less than 10 hours or  
minutes add a “0” before the number,  
for example for 12:05 start, press 1 2  
0 5.  
2 / 4  
ERASE : CANCE L  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
1 / 4  
DAT E  
2 5 / 1 2W  
PR START STOP  
1 2 : 0 5 1 2 : 0 5  
8
F
H
--  
--  
--  
/
/
/
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
:
:
:
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
:
:
:
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording  
9 Press '/"or the Number  
buttons to enter the stop time,  
then press |.  
14 (When you select “D:DVD” in step  
12, ensure the recordable DVD-  
RW/R is inserted into the  
• For example for 13:05 stop, press 1 3  
0 5.  
Recorder) Press TIMER ON/OFF  
to place the Recorder in TIMER  
STANDBY mode.  
• The TIMER indicator on the front of  
the Recorder lights up.  
©REC . MODE  
F : F I NE S : SP L : L P E : EP  
M : MANUA L ( 1 3 2 )  
VPS / PDC  
©
1 6  
+
VIDEO Plus  
: ON  
REC . MED I A  
H : HDD D : DVD  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
-
: OF F  
OPERATE  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
• The channel cannot be changed  
during TIMER STANDBY mode. To  
change the channel, set TIMER  
STANDBY to off.  
10 Press '/"to select “REC.  
MODE”, then use \/| to select  
the recording mode.  
• VPS/PDC is a signal broadcast by some TV  
stations which adjusts the start and stop  
time of your Recorder recording. This  
ensures that if there is a change in  
broadcast time for your programme the  
Recorder will still record the whole  
programme.  
When “M:MANUAL (1~32)” is  
selected:  
• Select the recording mode with \/|,  
then press SET/ENTER. (The  
recording mode can be selected from  
32 levels.)  
It is essential that the start time as it  
appears in the TV listing is used to  
programme the Recorder, as this informa-  
tion is used to identify the VPS/PDC signal  
corresponding to your programme.  
Even if recording by timer programming is  
completed, since the Recorder is VPS/PDC  
system compatible, the power may remain  
on internally (blue background output, LCD  
backlight off), but it will be turned off around  
4 AM the next day or three hours after  
recording is complete.  
• Data is still written to the disc after first  
timer recording is stopped, the first part of  
the next programme may not be recorded.  
• During recording, press REC STOP to  
cancel the recording. If there are further  
recordings to be made, the Recorder will  
not return to TIMER STANDBY mode.  
• When you set a DVD as recording media,  
timer recording will not start during disc  
playback. If “ALTERNATE RECORDING” is  
set to “YES”, the programme will be timer  
recorded to HDD.  
11 Press '/"to select “VPS/PDC”,  
then use \/| to turn the VPS/  
PDC setting ON(“∗”)/OFF  
(“-”).  
•
12 Press '/"to select “REC.  
MEDIA”, then use \/| to select  
the recording disc (“H:HDD” or  
“D:DVD”), then press SET/  
ENTER.  
1 / 4  
DAT E  
2 5 / 1 2W  
PR START STOP  
1 2 : 0 5 1 3 : 0 5  
8
S
D
--  
--  
--  
/
/
/
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
:
:
:
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
:
:
:
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
2 / 4  
ERASE : CANCE L  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
• If any more timer recordings are to be  
set, repeat step 4 to 12.  
•
•
Timer recording will not start during dubbing.  
Manual recording and editing cannot be  
performed during timer standby.  
13 When you have completed  
entering the timer settings, press  
START MENU or EXIT to exit  
from the “START MENU” screen.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Timer Recording  
Changing  
Confirm, Change and  
Cancel a Timer Programme  
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 of  
“Confirming” described left.  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
2 Press '/" to highlight the timer  
recording you want to change,  
The operation method is the same for both  
HDD and DVD.  
then press SET/ENTER to select.  
Confirming  
+
VIDEO Plus  
You can confirm on the Timer setting screen a  
list of all timer programmes that are already  
set.  
3 Press \ /| to highlight the setting  
to be changed and correct it by  
using ' /"/\/| or the Number  
buttons.  
Preparations for timer confirmation  
• If the TIMER indicator on the front of the  
Recorder is lit, press TIMER ON/OFF to  
turn off the TIMER indicator and to set the  
TIMER STANDBY mode to off.  
1 / 4  
DAT E  
2 6 / 1 2W  
PR START STOP  
1 2 : 0 5 1 3 : 0 5  
8
S
D
--  
--  
--  
/
/
/
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
:
:
:
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
:
:
:
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the “START MENU” screen.  
2 / 4  
ERASE : CANCE L  
: SE L ECT  
2 Press '/" / \ /| to select  
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
4 When all corrections are complete  
press SET/ENTER to confirm,  
then press START MENU or  
EXIT to exit.  
3 Press '/" to select “TIMER”.  
Press SET/ENTER to confirm.  
• All the timer recordings in the  
Recorder’s memory will be shown.  
Cancelling  
1 / 4  
DAT E  
2 5 / 1 2W  
PR START STOP  
1 2 : 0 5 1 3 : 0 5  
1 Follow steps 1 to 3 of  
8
S
D
“Confirming” described left.  
--  
--  
--  
/
/
/
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
:
:
:
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
:
:
:
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
2 Press '/" to highlight the timer  
recording to be cancelled, then  
press ERASE.  
2 / 4  
ERASE : CANCE L  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE T URN  
1 / 4  
DAT E  
PR START STOP  
--  
--  
--  
--  
/
/
/
/
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
-- -- -  
:
:
:
:
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
-- -  
:
:
:
:
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
-- ---  
4 If the settings are correct, press  
START MENU or EXIT to exit.  
2 / 4  
ERASE : CANCE L  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: RE TURN  
3 Press START MENU or EXIT to  
exit.  
NOTE  
• If there are some programmes to be  
recorded, do not forget to press TIMER  
ON/OFF to return the Recorder to TIMER  
STANDBY mode.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)  
Dubbing Method and Dubbing  
Types  
You can dub from HDD to DVD and DVD to HDD. It is  
recommended to dub important programmes recorded on  
HDD to DVD for safe keeping.  
Limitation during Dubbing  
Stopping Dubbing in the Middle  
• When dubbing “Copy Once” enabled programme from  
HDD to DVD-RW (CPRM compatible) is stopped in the  
middle, the part that was dubbed will be erased from  
HDD. If you restart the dubbing, you can dub the  
remaining part as a different title but overlap between title  
dubbed before and after the stop might be off.  
• Can dub up to five titles (programmes) in one session.  
• Cannot dub programmes that are not recorded properly.  
Dubbing Titles Including “Copy Once” En-  
High Speed Dubbing  
abled Programme  
• Copy titles recorded to HDD without any change of image  
quality and recording length. This Recorder can perform  
high speed dubbing with no loss of image quality of data  
so there is no degradation.  
• When dubbing titles including “Copy Once” enabled  
programme on HDD to DVD-RW, use DVD-RW (VR mode)  
Ver. 1.1 CPRM compatible disc.  
• “Copy Once” enabled programme recorded to HDD will  
move (recorded programme will be erased after the  
move) to DVD-RW. (You cannot dub in Video mode even if  
you use DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 CPRM compatible disc.)  
• Time to dub varies according to the recording mode of  
title (programme) to dub or type of disc you use.  
• When a blank 2X speed compatible disc is initialized with  
other DVD recorder, dubbing may be done at 1X speed  
even if high speed dubbing is selected.  
NOTE  
Example: Approximate time it takes to dub when you dub  
• Even if you select “HIGH SPEED DUBBING”, you may not  
be able to increase the speed of dubbing from 1✕  
depending on titles you want to dub and type of disc.  
• When title on HDD that includes “Copy Once” enabled  
title is divided into several chapters, you can add all the  
chapters to dubbing list by adding one of the chapters to  
dubbing list.  
programme 1 hour long  
Recording Mode of Source Title  
Required time  
FINE  
SP  
LP  
EP  
Using a 2✕-speed  
compatible disc  
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
30 min 15 min 7.5 min 5 min  
Using a 1✕-speed  
Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.  
60 min 30 min 15 min 10 min  
Dubbing Direction and Dubbing  
Speed  
compatible disc  
• Even if DVD-R is compatible to 4✕ speed dubbing the  
Recorder will handle as disc compatible to 2✕ speed  
dubbing.  
• If you perform high-speed dubbing of a “Copy Once”  
programme, dubbing will not be done at 2✕-speed, even  
if you use a 2✕-speed compatible disc.  
Dubbing Constant Speed  
High Speed  
Dubbing  
Direction  
Speed (Rate Conversion (High Speed  
Dubbing)  
Dubbing)  
*1  
*2  
*1  
HDD¡DVD-RW  
✕
✕
(VR mode)  
Rate Conversion Dubbing (Constant Speed)  
• Plays back titles of HDD and dubs to DVD-RW/R or plays  
back titles of DVD-RW/R and dubs to HDD.  
• Selects picture quality (recording mode) for dubbing. You  
can select among 32 levels of recording modes so it is  
convenient when you want to fit the programmes into one  
disc.  
• You can select among 32 levels of recording mode by  
using Manual setting but picture quality will not exceed  
the quality of original.  
HDD¡DVD-RW/R  
(Video mode)  
✕
✕
√
DVD-R/RW¡HDD  
—
✕
Can dub.  
— Cannot dub.  
√ Can High Speed Dub the recorded title if it is recorded  
using “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”.  
*1 Can just move the original title if that title is “Copy Once”  
enabled.  
*2 Cannot dub “Copy Once” enabled title.  
• Time to dub is about the same as time required to record  
the title in the beginning.  
NOTE  
• You cannot operate other functions while dubbing.  
—Timer programming will not start while dubbing.  
—You cannot record to HDD or playback titles on HDD  
while dubbing.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)  
Title Name and Chapter Mark Copied Rate Conversion Dubbing  
during Dubbing  
Limitation of Rate Conversion Dubbing  
• Title name and chapter mark are as follows:  
• “DOLBY VIRTUAL SURROUND” (page 65) will be set to  
“OFF” when rate conversion dubbing is used.  
• “DD OUTPUT LEVEL” (page 91) is set to “NO” when rate  
conversion dubbing is used.  
Chapter  
Mark  
Rate Conversion Dubbing  
Title Name  
• The image might look longer vertically when you dub 16:9  
image from HDD to DVD-RW/R (Video mode) using rate  
conversion dubbing. In such case, adjust TV setting to  
correct the playback image.  
• Chapter marks might shift slightly when dubbed using  
rate conversion dubbing.  
HDD↔DVD (VR mode)  
✕
✕
✕
*1  
—
—
HDD¡DVD (Video mode)  
*2  
✕
DVD (Video mode)¡HDD  
Chapter  
Mark  
High Speed Dubbing  
Title Name  
Dubbing from HDD to DVD  
HDD¡DVD (VR mode)  
✕
✕
✕
Limitation when Dubbing from HDD to DVD-  
*3  
HDD¡DVD (Video mode)  
✕
R/RW (Video Mode)  
You cannot dub from HDD to DVD-RW/R in following cases:  
• Total number of titles in DVD-RW/R reached 99 or total  
number of chapters reached 999.  
✕
Can dub.  
— Cannot dub.  
• HDD or DVD-RW/R is either recording or playing back.  
*1 Chapter mark of the dubbed title will not be copied  
when you dub from HDD to DVD-RW/R (Video mode)  
using rate conversion dubbing function. The chapters  
will be inserted according to the setting of auto chapter  
(either “10 min”, “15 min”, or “30 min”).  
Dubbing from DVD to HDD  
You cannot dub from DVD-RW/R to HDD in  
following cases:  
*2 You cannot dub from a finalized DVD-RW/R (Video  
mode) to HDD.  
• Not enough HDD capacity. (When there is not enough  
capacity in HDD, the Recorder will continue the dubbing  
until there is no more capacity.)  
*3 During dubbing from HDD to DVD-RW/R (Video mode)  
maximum chapter marks that could be dubbed using  
high speed dubbing is 99 per title.  
• Total number of titles in HDD reached 199 or total number  
of chapters reached 999.  
• Thumbnail will not be dubbed.  
• HDD or DVD-RW/R is either recording or playing back.  
• When you try to do this, dubbing will be suspended.  
When you dub a title that has both “Copy Once” and  
“Copy Freely” enabled programmes, only the “Copy  
Freely” enabled programme will be dubbed.  
• You cannot dub a “Copy Once” enabled programme  
recorded on a DVD-RW to the HDD.  
High Speed Dubbing  
Limitations on High Speed Dubbing when  
Dubbing from HDD to DVD (Video Mode)  
• During high speed dubbing, you cannot monitor the  
programme being dubbed on the TV screen.  
• If you stop high speed dubbing in the middle of process  
the recorded title might be erased.  
Dubbing from DVD to HDD  
• You can only dub programmes of DVD-RW/R (VR mode)  
to HDD. You cannot dub a disc that used another  
recorder.  
• You cannot dub a DVD-RW/R (Video mode) disc recorded  
with this Recorder after it has been finalized.  
If you cancel the finalization in DVD-RW (Video mode)  
disc, you can dub programmes.  
• You cannot high speed dub from a play list.  
“HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY” (page 92)  
• This function enables high-speed dubbing in both Video  
mode and VR mode.  
• If a title is recorded with “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” set to  
“NO”, you cannot perform high-speed dubbing in Video  
mode. Use “RATE CONVERSION DUBBING” (page 49).  
(This setting is unnecessary when performing high speed  
dubbing into VR mode.)  
• Cancel “HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY” when you  
want to edit frames of programmes recorded to HDD  
using “HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY”. You can edit  
the frames after the cancellation.  
• You cannot set “HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY” again  
to the programme that cancelled “HIGH SPEED DUBBING  
PRIORITY” once.  
• You cannot record 16:9 and 4:3 screen size images in one  
title.  
• The Recorder continues to dub the title in same screen  
size when it started dubbing even in case the screen size  
of title changed in the middle.  
• When you record a programme with bilingual broadcast  
with “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” set to “YES”, either “L CH” or  
“R CH” audio is recorded. See page 96 for details.  
• When recording 16:9 size image in LP, EP, or MN1-17  
recording modes, the image will be recorded as 4:3  
(squeezed).  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)  
When “MANUAL SETTING (MN)” is  
selected:  
• Set picture quality with \ / |, then press  
SET/ENTER. (Picture quality can be  
selected from 32 levels.)  
Dubbing (HDD↔DVD)/  
High Speed Dubbing  
(HDD¡DVD)  
s
DUBBING  
HDD ORIGINAL DVD  
25/12 10:28  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
ABLE TO SELECT 1 OF 32 LEVELS OF PICTURE QUALITY IN  
MANUAL REC. MODE BASED ON REMAINING CAPACITY.  
• You can choose titles and chapters as the  
unit to dub.  
EP  
LP  
SP  
FINE  
+
VIDEO Plus  
CURRENT MODE:MN 16  
REMAINING TIME:HDD 48h57m  
1 When dubbing from HDD to  
DVD  
Selecting Exact Dubbing  
• Select Exact Dubbing when there are  
multiple titles (up to 5) you want to dub and  
you know you cannot fit all into one disc.  
The Recorder will select the appropriate  
recording mode and fit all titles into one  
disc (maximum 6 hours).  
Load a recordable disc onto the  
disc tray, then press HDD.  
• Load the disc formatted in either VR  
mode or Video mode.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
• You cannot set recording mode to each  
titles when you select exact dubbing.  
• You cannot dub titles in higher quality than  
the original.  
• The Recorder will lower the recording  
mode when there is not enough capacity in  
the disc to dub compared to the length of  
all the titles (programmes). Be aware that  
original “Copy Once” enabled programme  
will be erased after dubbing.  
When dubbing from DVD to  
HDD  
Load a disc that recorded the title  
you want to dub, then press DVD.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
2 Press DUBBING.  
• You can select “DUBBING” in START  
MENU to dub.  
5 Press '/"/ \ /| to select the  
title to dub, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• Screen of step 4 will display when  
you dub from DVD to HDD.  
• Setting toggles between “dubbing”  
and “dubbing cancelled” each time  
you press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/" to select “HIGH  
SPEED DUBBING” or “RATE  
CONVERSION DUBBING”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Select more titles when you want to  
dub multiple titles. (You can dub up to  
5 titles at once.)  
• Screen of step 5 will display when  
you select “HIGH SPEED DUBBING”.  
Dubbing from HDD to DVD  
• When the DVD-RW/R is in Video  
mode, if a title has been recorded  
with HI SP DUB PRIORITY setting set  
to “NO”, then select “RATE CONVER-  
SION DUBBING”.  
s
DUBBING  
SELECTED TIME: 0h 10m  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
HDD ORIGINAL DVD  
25/12 10:28  
DVD REMAN: 2h10m  
TITLE INFO: 5/10 TUE 22:00  
23: 00  
1
2
3
4
5
6
4 Press '/" to select the record-  
ing mode (picture quality), then  
press SET/ENTER.  
ENTER  
SELECT  
TITLE LIST  
SET TITLE TO DUB  
CHAPTER  
NEXT STEP  
Dubbing mark displays to selected titles.  
Numbers will be assigned in order of  
selection and dubbing will start accord-  
ing to the numbers assigned.  
s
DUBBING  
HDD ORIGINAL DVD  
25/12 10:28  
SELECT THE RECORDING MODE.  
FINE (HIGH QUALITY)  
SP (STANDARD)  
LP (2X)  
EP (3X)  
6 Press Yellow (D) (NEXT STEP).  
7 Press SET/ENTER at the  
confirmation screen.  
• Dubbing start.  
ABLE TO MANUALLY SELECT  
OF 32 LEVELS.  
MANUAL SETTING (MN)  
EXACT DUBBING  
1
SELECT PICTURE QUALITY BASED  
ON REMAINING DVD CAPACITY.  
• You cannot select “EXACT DUBBING”  
when you dub from DVD to HDD.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)  
To Stop Dubbing  
Press DUBBING.  
• You can also stop dubbing by  
pressing ISTOP/LIVE or REC STOP.  
NOTE  
Dubbing Titles Recorded to HDD to  
Multiple DVDs  
• Operate Edit (page 77) to create Play List  
and dub Play List as a unit. (Example:  
Dubbing programmes more than 6 hours  
long like a Christmas special in recording  
mode you set.) If the original is dubbed as  
is using a recording mode other than  
“EXACT DUBBING”, the title will be  
dubbed (moved) until the disc is full. (For a  
“Copy Once” enabled programme, the  
dubbed part will be erased automatically  
from the HDD.) Take out the dubbed disc  
and load a new one to continue dubbing.  
• In case you want to divide and dub a  
“Copy Once” enabled programme to  
several discs, stop dubbing manually and  
reload the disc.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Front Panel Display during  
Dubbing  
• PLAY indicator of media of original source  
and REC indicator of media to dub light up  
during dubbing.  
• Front display panel shows dubbing  
movement in orange during dubbing.  
Example: Dubbing a programme from HDD  
to DVD.  
Dubbing indicator  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eliminating problems (Recording, Timer Recording, Dubbing)  
When You Cannot Record  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
• Load recordable DVD.  
• No disc in the Recorder.  
• Unrecordable disc is loaded.  
• Not enough disc capacity.  
• Recorder cannot identify the disc.  
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.  
• Disc is protected.  
• Cancel disc protection or change to new DVD for recording.  
• Not enough HDD capacity.  
• Erase recorded programmes you don’t want from HDD to  
create necessary capacity to record.  
• In the middle of dubbing.  
• You cannot record during dubbing. Stop dubbing before  
recording.  
When You Cannot Dub  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
• Title protection is set to copy once  
enabled title (programme).  
• You cannot dub Copy Once enabled title (programme) that is  
title protected.  
• No disc in the Recorder.  
• Unrecordable disc is loaded.  
• Load recordable DVD.  
• Not enough disc capacity.  
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.  
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD.  
• Recorder cannot identify the disc.  
• Disc is protected.  
• Not enough HDD capacity.  
• Erase recorded programmes you don’t want from HDD to  
create necessary capacity to record.  
• In the middle of recording/playback.  
• You cannot dub during recording/playback.  
• Recorded “Copy Once” enabled title  
(programme) to DVD.  
• “Copy Once” enabled title (programme) or title with signal  
that prohibits copying recorded to DVD cannot be dubbed to  
HDD.  
When You Cannot High Speed Dub  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
• No disc in the Recorder.  
• Unrecordable disc is loaded.  
• Load recordable DVD.  
• Not enough disc capacity.  
• Recorder cannot identify the disc.  
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.  
• Disc is protected.  
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD.  
• Trying to high speed dub from HDD to  
DVD in Video mode.  
• You cannot high speed dub from HDD to DVD in Video mode  
if “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” was not set to “YES” when the  
original title was recorded to HDD.  
• Cannot High Speed Dub although  
“HIGH SPEED DUBBING” is selected.  
• Use 2X-speed compatible disc.  
• High speed dubbing of “Copy Once” enabled title will take  
longer than normal high speed dubbing.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eliminating problems (Recording, Timer Recording, Dubbing)  
When You Cannot Timer Record  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
• Load recordable DVD.  
• No disc in the Recorder.  
• Unrecordable disc is loaded.  
• Not enough disc capacity.  
• Recorder cannot identify the disc.  
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.  
• Disc is protected.  
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD for  
recording.  
• Not enough HDD capacity.  
• Erase recorded programmes you don’t want from HDD to  
create necessary capacity to record.  
• Number of timer programmes set has  
reached the limit.  
• Erase unnecessary timer programmes.  
• Dubbing recorded title.  
• Timer recording does not work during dubbing. Stop dub-  
bing before timer recording.  
• Playing back the DVD.  
• Stop playing back the DVD more than 3 minutes before timer  
recording starts. If you don’t stop playback until timer  
recording start time, timer recording will not start.  
• In the middle of direct recording.  
• Timer recording does not function during direct recording.  
Stop direct recording before the preset start time for timer  
recording.  
NOTE  
• If you set multiple timers, and the programmed times overlap, or the end time of the previous timer is the same as the start  
time of the next timer, timer recording will begin after the preceding timer recording finishes. There will be a delay of up to 1  
minute before the next timer recording begins.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDD Playback  
REC LIST: If you select the programme you  
NOTE  
want to watch from the list of recorded  
programmes (REC LIST) and press SET/  
ENTER, playback will begin.  
• The final few seconds may not be played  
back, depending on how the recording was  
stopped.  
• The end position of the programme played  
back may be shifted slightly from the  
position where recording was stopped  
during recording.  
NOTE  
• To display the counter during playback,  
press ON SCREEN (page 31).  
To playback edited video:  
+
• When playing back video which has been  
edited (for example, by making a play list),  
use Seamless Playback for smoother  
connection between scenes.  
• For details on Seamless Playback settings,  
see page 92.  
VIDEO Plus  
Resume playback function  
• If you press |PLAY again, playback will  
resume from the point where it was  
previously stopped.  
• To playback from the beginning, press  
ISTOP/LIVE again and then press  
|PLAY.  
Inserting Chapter Marks  
during Playback  
Playback  
HDD  
• You can insert chapter marks by pressing  
CHAPTER MARK (under the cover).  
Chapter marks are inserted after the  
message “RECORDED CHAPTER MARK.”  
appears.  
• You cannot insert chapter marks during  
Simultaneous Recording/Playback.  
1 Press HDD to select HDD mode.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
• HDD mode is selected automatically  
when the power is turned on.  
SWITCHED TO HDD MODE.  
NOTE  
• To playback a play list created by editing,  
press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST.  
Each time this button is pressed, the  
setting will toggle between “ORIGINAL”  
(original titles) and “PLAY LIST”.  
2 Press |PLAY.  
• PLAY indicator (for HDD) on the front  
of Recorder is lit green during  
playback.  
HDD  
OR  
I
G
I
N
AL  
F I NE  
REMAIN18h59  
m
1
4
0
/
/
0
3 8  
6
:
2 0  
:
0 0  
• To fast forward or fast reverse: Press  
JFWD or GREV during playback.  
Each time these buttons are pressed,  
the speed cycles through the  
following settings:  
Press |PLAY to return to normal  
playback.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
3 Press ISTOP/LIVE to stop  
playback.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDD Playback  
About REC LIST  
Playback from REC LIST  
When the REC LIST is displayed, you can use  
the following functions by pressing Blue (A)  
or Red (B) on the remote control.  
HDD  
1 Press HDD to select HDD mode.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
• Switch between Thumbnail screen and Title  
Name List screen by pressing Blue (A).  
• When Thumbnail screen is selected, switch  
between Title List and Chapter List by  
pressing Red (B).  
Chapters in selected title will be displayed  
in Chapter List.  
• Sort the Title List in the “From New”, “From  
Old” or “Title Name (alphabetical)” order.  
1 Press Red (B).  
2 Press \/ |to select “FROM NEW”,  
“FROM OLD” or “TITLE NAME”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• HDD mode is selected automatically  
when the power is turned on.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
2 Press REC LIST to display REC  
LIST (THUMBNAIL).  
• The REC LIST can also be displayed  
from the START MENU (see page 26).  
• To switch between Original Title List  
and Play List, press ORIGINAL/PLAY  
LIST. Each time the button is  
pressed, “ORIGINAL” (original titles)  
or “PLAY LIST” is selected in turn.  
ORIGINAL PLAY LIST  
Icons Displayed in Title Info  
Field of REC LIST  
REC LIST(HDD: ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
25/12 10:28  
NEW TITLE  
TITLE INFO: 2/10 SAT 20:00  
21: 00  
Displays HDD only.  
(Will not display in case you playback,  
edit, or set Title Protection.)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
TITLE PROTECTION  
(HDD, DVD-RW [VR mode] only)  
“Copy Once” enabled Programme  
(Copy Restricted) (HDD only)  
• If you press Blue (A) (TITLE LIST),  
HI SP DUB PRIORITY SETTING  
(HDD only)  
you can switch to title list.  
TITLE LIST  
REC LIST(HDD ORIGINAL)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 2/10 SAT 20:00  
21: 00  
BACK  
TITLE  
REC. DATE  
START  
TIME  
1
PR33 FINE  
PR33 FINE  
PR33 FINE  
PR33 FINE  
PR33 FINE  
PR33 FINE  
2/10 SAT 20: 00  
60MIN  
60MIN  
60MIN  
60MIN  
60MIN  
60MIN  
2
3
4
5
6
9/10 SAT 20: 00  
16/10 SAT 20: 00  
23/10 SAT 20: 00  
20: 00  
30/10 SAT  
6/11 SAT 20: 00  
NEXT  
FROM NEW  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
THUMBNAIL  
ENTER  
RETURN  
B
SORT  
FUNC. MENU  
• Press Blue (A) (THUMBNAIL) to  
switch from title list to thumbnail.  
3 Press '/ "/ \/ |to select the  
programme you want to watch.  
Thumbnail screen: Press '/ "to  
switch pages.  
Title Name List screen: Press '/ "to  
select a title name.  
4 Press SET/ENTER or |PLAY.  
• Playback begins.  
To Stop Playback  
Press ISTOP/LIVE.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDD Playback  
Playback by Selecting  
Title Number (Direct Playback)  
HDD  
You can start playback from the title you want  
to see.  
1 Press HDD to select HDD mode.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
2 Press DIRECT while playback  
stops or during playback.  
3 Press '/ "to select the title  
number you want to see, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
Title number currently  
selected  
1
/
38  
• Playback starts from the beginning of  
the selected title.  
NOTE  
• You can select the title number to play  
back by using Function Control screen  
(page 64).  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDD Playback  
Still Picture Playback/  
Frame Advance Playback  
Other Types of Playback  
HDD  
This feature enables still playback and frame  
advance playback.  
• This section explains other types of HDD  
playback operations.  
F
1 Press STILL/PAUSE during  
Fast Forward/Reverse  
(Search)  
Use to fast forward/reverse programmes  
being played.  
playback.  
• Playback pauses.  
• PLAY indicator (for HDD) on the front  
of Recorder blinks during Still Picture  
Playback.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
1 Press JFWD or GREV during  
playback.  
2 Press Lor Kto advance or  
reverse playback image frame by  
frame.  
Example: When JFWD is pressed  
• The search speed will cycle as  
follows each time you press the  
button.  
• Press Lto advance one frame.  
Press Kto reverse one frame.  
3 Press |PLAY to return to normal  
playback.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
Skip Search  
This lets you skip about 30 seconds ahead.  
This is convenient when you want to skip  
commercials while viewing.  
2 Press |PLAY to cancel the  
search.  
• Search will be cancelled and  
playback screen displays.  
• You cannot fast forward or fast  
reverse from one title and continue to  
another title.  
Press SKIP SEARCH during play-  
back.  
• You can skip approximately 30 seconds  
forward each time you press the button.  
• The maximum interval you can skip at one  
time is 120 seconds (4 button presses).  
• Skip Search will not work during Time Shift  
Viewing.  
• When you fast forward or fast reverse  
to the end or beginning of the title,  
normal playback screen displays  
automatically.  
Replay  
Skipping to Next Chapter  
This lets you skip about 10 seconds back.  
This is convenient for replaying a short scene  
you missed.  
You can skip the chapter using this function.  
Press Kor Lduring playback.  
• Press Lto go to the start of the next  
chapter.  
• Press Konce to return to the start of  
current chapter (track). If you press it again  
(within about 5 seconds), it will skip to the  
beginning of the previous chapter (track).  
• This function does not work during Time  
Shift Viewing.  
Press REPLAY during playback.  
• Playback reverses approximately 10  
seconds, then starts again.  
• Replay will not work during Time Shift  
Viewing.  
Slow Playback  
This lets you playback video at slow speed.  
1 Press SLOW during playback.  
• The slow playback speed will cycle  
as follows each time you press the  
button.  
1
/
8g) (Approx. 1/16g)  
1
(Approx.  
2g)  
(Approx.  
/
2 Press |PLAY to return to normal  
playback.  
• You cannot perform slow playback  
over a boundary between titles. At  
the end of the title, slow playback will  
be cancelled and normal playback  
will be selected automatically.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HDD Playback  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
Switching Audio  
You can change the audio output channel  
during HDD playback.  
Example: Repeat playback of a title  
(TITLE)  
Each time AUDIO is pressed, the  
audio channels change.  
TITLE REPEAT  
• The way audio channels change differs  
depending on the sound recorded on HDD.  
See the table on page 96 for details.  
5 Press  
(INPUT) to return to  
normal playback.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
NOTE  
• When you play a programme recorded in  
stereo or monaural, and if you are listening  
to the BIT STREAM sound via the digital  
output jack, you cannot select the audio  
channel. Set “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” to  
“PCM” (see page 91), or if you want to  
change the audio channel, listen via the  
analogue output jacks.  
A-B Repeat Playback  
(Repeat Playback of a  
Specified Part)  
1 Press  
(INPUT) during  
playback.  
2 Press \/|to select “A-B”, then  
Zoom  
press SET/ENTER.  
You can magnify your favorite section.  
3 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the scene you want to start  
Repeat Playback.  
Press  
ZOOM during playback.  
ZOOM: 1  
• The start point of the part (A) will be  
memorized.  
• Each time you press this button, the zoom  
setting cycles in the following sequence:  
ZOOM: 1 (approx. 1.2✕) ¡ ZOOM: 2  
(approx. 1.5✕) ¡ ZOOM: 3 (approx. 2.0✕)  
¡ OFF: (No display).  
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.  
TITLE  
CHAPTER  
A-B  
SET START PT  
ENTER  
SET REPEAT START POINT  
• You can move the enlarged part with '/  
"/\/|.  
• Zoom will not work during Time Shift  
Viewing.  
4 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the scene you want to end  
Repeat Playback.  
To return to the normal screen, press  
ZOOM a few times and cancel Zoom mode.  
• The end point of the part (B) will be  
memorized and the Repeat Playback  
for the specified part (A-B) starts.  
Repeat Playback of a Title  
or Chapter (Repeat Play-  
back)  
5 Press  
(INPUT) to return to  
normal playback.  
NOTE  
1 Play back the title or chapter you  
• For A-B Repeat Playback, set the start and  
end points within the same title.  
want to repeat.  
2 Press  
(INPUT).  
3 Press \/|to select the type of  
Repeat Playback.  
• TITLE: Repeats the title currently  
playing back.  
• CHAPTER: Repeats the chapter  
currently playing back.  
• A-B: Repeats the specified scene of  
title or chapter.  
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.  
TITLE  
CHAPTER  
A-B  
ENTER  
\| SELECT  
ENTER  
• Press RETURN to cancel without  
setting the type of Repeat Playback.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD/CD Playback  
This section explains playback of DVD-RW/R  
discs recorded with this Recorder, commer-  
cially available DVD Video discs (like movies)  
and CDs.  
4 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
title (or chapter) you wish to view.  
REC LIST(DVD ORIGINAL)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
• To playback a DVD-RW/R recorded with  
this Recorder, select the title to be played  
back, and then start playback.  
TITLE INFO: 10/11  
1
M
ON 16:00  
16: 10  
2
3
• Display the list of initial images (thumb-  
nails) for each title, and select a title. (REC  
LIST)  
4
5
6
+
VIDEO Plus  
Loading Disc  
5 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Playback will begin from the selected  
title (chapter).  
1 Press OPERATE to turn the  
power on.  
• PLAY indicator (for DVD) on the front  
of Recorder is lit green during  
playback.  
2 Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the  
disc tray.  
OPEN/CLOSE  
6 To stop playback, press ISTOP/  
LIVE.  
OPERATE  
To Record a Chapter Mark  
during Playback  
DVD  
3 Load a disc on the disc tray.  
Press CHAPTER MARK (under the  
cover).  
• The message “RECORDED CHAPTER  
MARK.” is displayed, and the chapter mark  
is recorded.  
OPER  
ATE  
• Chapter marks can be set during playback  
only with DVD-RW (VR mode).  
• Chapter marks cannot be set manually for  
DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD-R or during  
Simultaneous Recording/Playback.  
• Insert the disc with the label face up.  
• In case of disc recorded on both  
sides, face the side you want to view  
down.  
NOTE  
• If a title was set with another DVD recorder,  
and it contains characters which cannot be  
4 Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the  
....  
displayed with this Recorder, then “  
”
disc tray.  
****  
is displayed (up to 64 characters max.).  
• If you play back a play list on a disc  
DVD-RW/R Playback  
recorded with another DVD recorder and 1  
title is 12 hours or more in length, only 12  
hours of that title will be played back.  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD-R  
1 Press DVD to select DVD mode.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
Playback by Selecting Title  
• To play back a disc recorded and finalized  
in Video mode, press DVD TITLE, display  
the “TITLE MENU” screen, and select a title  
to play back.  
• HDD mode is selected automatically  
when the power is turned on.  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD-R  
1 Press DVD to select DVD mode.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
SWITCHED TO DVD/CD MODE.  
• HDD mode is selected automatically  
when the power is turned on.  
2 Load the disc you want to play  
back.  
2 Load a disc recorded in Video  
mode.  
3 Press REC LIST to display the  
REC LIST (thumbnail) screen.  
• See page 54 for details on how to use  
the REC LIST.  
3 Press DVD TITLE.  
• The “TITLE MENU” screen is dis-  
played.  
• If the loaded disc has a play list and  
you press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST, the  
screen will switch to the play list  
(page 69).  
Continued on Next Page |||  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD/CD Playback  
4 Press '/" to select the title.  
Audio CD/Video CD Playback  
5 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Playback of the selected title will  
begin.  
VIDEO CD  
AUDIO CD  
Preparation  
Press DVD and load a disc.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
6 To stop playback, press ISTOP/  
LIVE.  
NOTE  
• If a disc recorded in Video mode has been  
finalized (pages 15, 99), a menu screen will  
be created automatically to enable  
playback with other DVD players. For that  
reason, the menu screen is different before  
and after finalization.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Playback from the beginning  
1 Press |PLAY.  
• Playback begins from the first track.  
2 To stop playback, press ISTOP/  
• If a title was set with another DVD recorder,  
and it contains characters which cannot be  
LIVE.  
....  
displayed with this Recorder, then “  
”
****  
Playback by selecting the  
track  
1 1 Press DIRECT.  
2 Select the track number to be  
played back using the Number  
buttons, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
is displayed (up to 64 characters max.).  
If there is a timer programme which is set  
to record on DVD:  
• A message to that effect will be displayed 5  
minutes prior to the start of the timer  
recording. If that happens, stop DVD  
playback and load the disc for recording.  
• The timer recording will be cancelled at the  
start time of the timer recording if DVD  
playback is still in progress.  
• Playback starts from the selected  
track.  
Example: To select the 12th song  
(track), press 1, then 2.  
• You can also select the track by  
pressing '/".  
• DIRECT does not work when playing  
back a video CD with PBC on.  
Resume playback function  
• If you press |PLAY next, playback will  
resume from the point where it stopped the  
previous time. To playback from the  
beginning, cancel resume mode by  
pressing ISTOP/LIVE then press |PLAY.  
(Resume playback will be cancelled when  
you open the disc tray, turn the power off,  
or switch to HDD.)  
2 To stop playback, press ISTOP/  
LIVE.  
Video CD (with PBC)  
Playback  
• Some video CD discs have Playback  
Control (PBC) function which guides the  
playback by the menu displayed.  
• Resume playback function does not work  
during video CD playback.  
DVD Video Playback  
DVD VIDEO  
Video CD (with PBC)  
If you press |PLAY after you load a disc, the  
menu displays. The functions of button  
changes in the following manner during the  
playback operation using the menu.  
• Lbecomes the “NEXT” button.  
• Kbecomes the “PREVIOUS” button.  
Select the track number to be played back  
from the menu using the Number buttons and  
play back the track.  
Example: To select the 5th track, press 0,  
then 5.  
(Operation method may differ depending on  
the disc. Refer to the manual of the video  
CD.)  
Turning off PBC function when playing  
back a PBC compatible video CD  
Playback begins from track 1 when JFWD  
is pressed before the menu is displayed after  
you load a disc. Playback will follow the track  
order like an audio CD.  
1 Press DVD and load a disc.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
• Playback may begin automatically,  
depending on the disc.  
2 Press |PLAY.  
• Playback begins from the first title.  
• The menu may be displayed first,  
depending on the disc. Perform  
playback operation by following the  
directions on the screen.  
• To stop playback, press ISTOP/  
LIVE.  
* If you want to turn the PBC to “ON” when  
playing back the CD with PBC off, press  
ISTOP/LIVE twice and then press |PLAY  
to display the menu.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD/CD Playback  
Playback by Selecting a  
Title (Track) Number (Direct  
Playback)  
Press DIRECT, then select title (track) number  
to play back. See page 55 for details.  
Other Types of Playback  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
DVD-R  
DVD VIDEO  
VIDEO CD  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
AUDIO CD  
• This section explains other types of DVD  
playback operations.  
Repeat Playback of a Title  
or Chapter (Repeat Play-  
back)  
Fast Forward/Reverse  
(Search)  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Fast Forward/Reverse functions when  
JFWD or GREV is pressed during  
playback.  
1 Play back the title or chapter you  
want to repeat.  
Example: When JFWD is pressed  
• The search speed will cycle as follows  
each time you press the button.  
When playing back a DVD  
2 Press  
(INPUT).  
3 Press \/|to select the type of  
Repeat Playback.  
• TITLE: Repeats the title currently  
playing back.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
• CHAPTER: Repeats the chapter  
currently playing back.  
• A-B: Repeats the specified scene of  
title or chapter.  
When playing back a video CD or audio  
CD  
(Approx. 8g)  
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.  
(Approx. 2g)  
TITLE  
CHAPTER  
A-B  
ENTER  
\| SELECT  
ENTER  
Skipping to the Beginning  
of a Chapter (Track)  
Skipping (to the beginning of a chapter or  
track) functions when Lor Kis  
pressed during playback.  
• Press RETURN to cancel without  
setting the type of Repeat Playback.  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
Example: Repeat playback of a title  
(TITLE)  
Slow Playback  
Slow Playback functions when SLOW is  
pressed during playback.  
TITLE REPEAT  
1
(Approx.  
/2g)  
/
8g) (Approx. 1/16g)  
1
(Approx.  
5 Press  
(INPUT) to return to  
normal playback.  
Still Picture Playback/  
Frame Advance Playback  
A-B Repeat Playback  
(Repeat Playback of a  
Specified Part)  
• Still Picture Playback functions when  
FSTILL/PAUSE is pressed during  
playback. (If you are playing back an audio  
CD, the CD will pause.)  
• Frame Advance/Reverse Playback  
functions when Lor Kis pressed  
during Still Picture Playback.  
• Frame Reverse Playback will not work  
with DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD-R,  
DVD Video and Video CD discs.  
• PLAY indicator (for DVD) on the front of  
Recorder blinks during Still Picture  
Playback.  
1 Press  
(INPUT) during  
playback.  
2 Press \/|to select “A-B”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the scene you want to start  
Repeat Playback.  
• The start point of the part (A) will be  
memorized.  
Skip Search  
Playback skips 30 seconds ahead when  
SKIP SEARCH is pressed during playback.  
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.  
TITLE  
CHAPTER  
A-B  
SET START PT  
ENTER  
SET REPEAT START POINT  
Replay  
Playback reverses 10 seconds when  
REPLAY is pressed during playback.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD/CD Playback  
4 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the scene you want to end  
Repeat Playback.  
2 Press '/" to select the subtitles  
you want to see.  
• You can select by pressing SUB-  
TITLE.  
• The end point of the part (B) will be  
memorized and the Repeat Playback  
for the specified part (A-B) starts.  
• The display indicates the subtitle  
number currently being played back,  
and the subtitles appear.  
• To hide the subtitles, press \/|a  
few times and select “OFF”.  
You can also select “OFF” by  
pressing SUBTITLE or '/".  
5 Press  
(INPUT) to return to  
normal playback.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Function Control  
Zoom  
You can do things like specify a title or  
chapter, and adjust settings for video and  
audio if you press FUNCTION (under the  
cover) during playback. (For details see page  
You can magnify your favorite section by  
pressing ZOOM during playback.  
• Each time you press this button, the zoom  
setting cycles in the following sequence:  
ZOOM: 1 (approx. 1.2✕)¡ZOOM: 2  
(approx. 1.5✕)¡ZOOM: 3 (approx.  
2.0✕)¡OFF (No display)  
64.)  
Switching Audio  
You can change the audio output channel  
using the AUDIO button (under the cover).  
• You can move the enlarged part with '/  
"/\/|.  
Each time AUDIO is pressed, the  
audio channels change as follows:  
ZOOM: 1  
VIDEO CD  
AUDIO CD  
L+R  
L
R
Switching Angle  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD VIDEO  
The sound number which is currently played  
back will be displayed.  
If multiple angles are recorded, you can  
switch between them.  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
Press ANGLE (under the cover)  
during playback.  
• The display indicates the angle number  
currently being played back. Each time you  
press this button, the angle switches.  
• The angle can also be switched by  
pressing '/".  
The sound you can select varies depending  
on the sound recorded on the disc. (page 96)  
• When recording bilingual broadcast or  
stereo, the way audio channel changes  
may differ depending on the recorded  
sound. See the table on page 96 for details.  
• “✕✕” is displayed if a disc is recorded with  
only one angle.  
NOTE  
•
When you play a programme recorded in  
stereo or monaural, and if you are listening  
to the BIT STREAM sound via the digital  
output jack, you cannot select the audio  
channel. Set “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” to  
“PCM” (see page 91), or if you want to  
change the audio channel, listen via the  
analogue output jacks.  
1
To return to the previous angle, press ANGLE  
(under the cover) a few times to select the  
original angle.  
Switching Subtitles  
DVD VIDEO  
NOTE  
• The following operations will not work when  
playing back an audio CD:  
Slow Playback, Frame Advance/Reverse  
Display of functions  
• The display for subtitle, angle or audio  
automatically disappears after 10 seconds.  
The display can also be hidden by  
pressing SET/ENTER.  
Switching between functions  
• You can switch subtitle, angle and audio at  
the Function Control screen (page 64).  
• Operation for each function varies depend-  
ing on the disc. See the manual for the  
disc.  
If subtitles are provided in multiple lan-  
guages, you can switch between them.  
1 Press SUBTITLE (under the  
cover) during playback.  
• The display indicates the subtitle  
number currently being played back,  
and the subtitles appear.  
• “✕✕” is displayed if a disc has no  
subtitles.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD/CD Playback  
Fast Forward/Reverse  
2 Press '/"/ \/|to select the  
title, then press SET/ENTER.  
• The selected title is played back.  
• You cannot perform Fast Forward/Fast  
Reverse over a boundary between titles.  
At the end or beginning of the title, Fast  
Forward/Fast Reverse will be cancelled  
and normal playback will be selected  
automatically.  
• Audio is not played back during Fast  
Forward and Fast Reverse.  
• Subtitles are not played back with DVD  
video discs and video CDs during Fast  
Forward and Fast Reverse.  
• Depending on the disc and the scene  
being played back, the Recorder may not  
operate at the speed listed in this manual  
when performing Fast Forward.  
Slow Playback  
• You cannot perform Slow Playback over a  
boundary between titles. At the end of the  
title, Slow Playback will be cancelled and  
normal playback will be selected  
automatically.  
NOTE  
• The procedure explained on this page is  
the basic operation procedure. Procedures  
vary depending on the DVD video disc, so  
operate by following the instructions in the  
DVD video disc manual, or the instructions  
displayed on the screen.  
• A title menu is not displayed for a DVD-R/  
RW (Video mode) if it has not been  
finalized.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Title menu  
• With some DVD discs, the title menu may  
be explained using the name “Top Menu”.  
For the button explained as the top menu  
key, use DVD TITLE on the remote control.  
• If no title menu is available, the title menu  
will not display even if DVD TITLE is  
pressed.  
Repeat Playback  
• Repeat Playback will not work during PBC  
playback of a video CD with PBC (Play-  
back Control).  
Using the Disc Menu  
Example: Select “SUBTITLE LANGUAGE”.  
• Repeat Playback may be forbidden  
depending on the disc.  
• A-B Repeat Playback may not work in  
multi-angle scenes.  
1 Press DVD MENU.  
MENU  
• For A-B Repeat Playback, set the start and  
end points within the same title.  
1
2
3
AUDIO LANGUAGE  
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE  
AUDIO  
Playback by Selecting  
with the Menu in the DVD  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD-R  
DVD VIDEO  
• The disc menu screen is displayed.  
• This section explains how to play back a  
DVD video disc with a top menu or disc  
menu.  
2 Press '/" to select “SUBTITLE  
LANGUAGE”.  
• Titles listed in the title menu, and a disc  
guide (for options like subtitles and audio  
languages) are given in the disc menu.  
3 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Screen to select subtitle language is  
displayed.  
4 Press '/" to select the subtitle  
Playback by Selecting a  
Title from the Title Menu  
language.  
1 Press DVD TITLE.  
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE  
• The title menu screen is displayed.  
1
2
3
English  
Español  
Français  
T I T L E M E N U  
1
3
2
4
Jazz  
Latin  
Rock  
Classic  
5 Press SET/ENTER.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MP3 File Playback  
CD-R  
MP3  
CD-RW  
MP3  
To Play Another File  
(music title) during  
Playback  
NOTE  
• When the DV input is selected, discs  
cannot be played back if “DV LINK” is set  
to “ON”. You can enjoy other sounds by  
switching to other channels.  
• See page 12 for details about the MP3 file  
format.  
1 Press ISTOP/LIVE to stop  
playback.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
2 Press '/"/ \ /| to select the file  
1 Press DVD to select DVD mode.  
(music title) you want to play, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
2 Load an MP3 recorded CD-R or  
the CD-RW, then press DVD  
MENU.  
• The chosen file (music title) will be  
played.  
CD MP3  
To Skip the File during  
Playback  
1
4
1
3
WOLF  
2
4
SHARK  
TRISH  
1
1
ANGEL  
1
Press SKIP  
or  
SKIP.  
• Press SKIP  
to skip forward.  
• Press  
SKIP to skip backward.  
While the MP3 disc is playing  
3 Press '/"/\ /| to select the  
folder you want to play, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Time Search is disabled.  
• Programmed Playback is disabled.  
• It is possible to repeat one track by  
• The file (music title) in the folder is  
displayed on the file selection screen.  
pressing  
(INPUT).  
• Dolby Virtual Surround does not operate.  
CD MP3  
1/15  
--:--:--  
WOLF  
1
3
5
7
9
YOUNG  
MAIN  
2
4
6
8
ANDREW  
BAY  
BARDEN  
BEACHES  
YORK  
QUEEN  
VICTORIA  
10 KING  
• Press RETURN to return to the folder  
selection screen.  
• If you press |PLAY after selecting  
the folder, the playback screen is  
displayed, and the files in that folder  
will be played from the beginning  
repeatedly.  
4 Press '/"/\ /| to select the file  
(music title) you want to play and  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• Playback will start from the selected  
file (music title).  
CD MP3  
1/15  
00:00 :11  
WOLF  
1
3
5
7
9
YOUNG  
MAIN  
2
4
6
8
ANDREW  
BAY  
BARDEN  
BEACHES  
YORK  
QUEEN  
VICTORIA  
10 KING  
5 Press ISTOP/LIVE to stop  
playback.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings During Playback  
Function Control Operation  
Procedure  
Function Control  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD VIDEO  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
This lets you make various settings at once,  
like subtitle and angle setting, and title  
selection for Direct Playback.  
Depending on your preferences, you can  
adjust video and enjoy audio with a greater  
sense of presence. Operation is the same for  
HDD and DVD.  
1 Press FUNCTION (under the  
cover) during playback.  
• The Function Control screen is  
displayed on the TV.  
DVD VIDEO  
VIDEO  
+
VIDEO Plus  
1
5
0
/
/
0
3
2
:
5
0
0
.
:
0
c
0
h
Function Control screen  
2 ENGLISH  
1
1
DVD VIDEO  
VIDEO  
5
1
1
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
1
5
0
/
/
0
3
2
:
5
0
0
.
:
0
c
0
h
2 ENGLISH  
1
1
BIT RATE  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
0
5
10  
n
RETURN  
2
Mbps  
5
1
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
2 Press '/" to select setting  
items, then press SET/ENTER.  
• For a description of each setting item,  
see “Functions which can be set”  
(page 65).  
BIT RATE  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
0
5
10  
n
RETURN  
Mbps  
3
4
DVD VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1 Playback status display  
Shows the operation status and the drive or  
disc type.  
1
5
0
/
/
0
3
2
:
5
0
0
.
:
0
c
0
h
2 ENGLISH  
1
1
5
1
2 Setting items  
Selects a title or chapter for playback, or  
performs video/audio settings.  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
BIT RATE  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
0
5
10  
n
RETURN  
Mbps  
3 Operation guide display  
Provides help on how to operate with the  
remote control buttons.  
3 Press '/"/\ /| to set, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Operation may vary depending on  
the setting item. Operate by following  
the operation guide instructions on  
the screen.  
4 Bit rate display  
Displays the data rate of the video appearing  
on the TV screen.  
4 Press RETURN or FUNCTION  
(under the cover) to close the  
Function Control screen.  
NOTE  
• If “✕✕” is displayed for an option like title  
number or subtitles, the disc has no titles  
or subtitles which can be selected.  
• When you press DIRECT or SUBTITLE, the  
Function Control screen is closed.  
• If you set to the Function Control screen  
during playback of a DVD video, it may be  
impossible to operate according to the  
instructions from the DVD video. In cases  
like this, operate again after cancelling the  
Function Control screen.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Settings During Playback  
Functions which can be set  
Title Number (Direct Title Skip)  
Digital Gamma  
• Shows the title number being played back. You can  
• If a video is dark and hard to see, you can brighten the  
dark parts for easier viewing by setting Digital Gamma.  
Set this when watching discs with many dark scenes  
(i.e. movie and concert discs), and when viewing a  
disc in a bright room. This lets you see dark parts  
better and enjoy video with a greater sense of depth.  
• Press ' /" to select “ON” or “OFF”, then press \/|  
to set the level. Then press SET/ENTER.  
skip to the start of the title.  
Chapter Number (Direct Chapter Skip)  
• Shows the chapter number being played back. You  
can skip to the start of the chapter.  
• Digital Gamma can be set to three different levels.  
Playback Elapsed Time (Direct Time  
Skip)  
• Shows the elapsed time from the beginning of the disc  
to the present.  
This lets you skip based on time.  
• Press \ /| to move to the field of Hour, Minute,  
Second, then press ' /" to set the time. Press SET/  
ENTER to start playback from that set time.  
Dolby Virtual Surround  
• Lets you enjoy surround audio via analogue connec-  
tion with a stereo type (2ch) TV or audio equipment.  
• Even if you use a digital connection, Dolby Virtual  
Surround will work in the following cases.  
– When playing back linear PCM audio from a DVD.  
– When playing back Dolby Digital audio while  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT (page 91) is set to “PCM”.  
• This Recorder uses a Spatializer System* for Dolby  
Digital Surround.  
* Certain audio features of this product manufactured  
under a license from Desper Products, Inc.  
Spatializer® N-2-2™ and the circle-in-square device  
are trademarks owned by Desper Products, Inc.  
• If audio recorded monaurally is played back with  
Dolby Virtual Surround ON, the audio level may  
decrease, making it hard to hear. If this happens, turn  
Dolby Virtual Surround OFF.  
Subtitle Language  
• Shows the currently selected subtitle language.  
If subtitles are provided in other languages, you can  
switch to your preferred language.  
Angle Number  
• Shows the currently selected angle number.  
If the video is recorded with multiple angles, you can  
switch the angle.  
• Dolby Virtual Surround will not work in the following  
cases:  
– While watching a TV broadcast or external input.  
– Multi-karaoke audio from a karaoke disc, 96 kHz 24-  
bit linear PCM audio, or DTS audio.  
• If you set Dolby Virtual Surround to “ON” and audio  
sounds funny during playback, set it to “OFF”.  
• There are no level settings.  
Audio  
• Shows the currently selected type of audio.  
You can select the desired type of audio.  
NOTE  
Digital Super Picture  
• These functions cannot be used with all discs.  
• Emphasizes and enhances definition of details and  
contours in the video. This reduces noise and makes  
video easier to see.  
• Press ' /" to select “ON” or “OFF”, then press \/|  
to set the level. Then press SET/ENTER.  
• There is one setting level on the “soft” side and 3  
setting levels on the “sharp” side.  
• If you want to enjoy a more defined picture (with  
detailed pictures), press | while “ON” is displayed for  
Digital Super Picture. For old movies or videos with a  
lot of noise, you can reduce noise for an easier to see  
picture by pressing \ while “ON” is displayed for  
Digital Super Picture.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Simultaneous Recording/Playback Function  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
DVD VIDEO  
Playing Back a Title on  
the HDD during DVD  
Recording (Simultaneous  
Recording/Playback)  
VIDEO CD  
AUDIO CD  
Plays back from HDD, DVD or CD while  
recording a programme onto HDD.  
Viewing the Programme  
Being Recorded from the  
Beginning while  
1 Press HDD during DVD recording.  
• The HDD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
2 Play back the title in the HDD.  
Recording to HDD  
(Chasing Playback)  
Viewing Another  
Programme Recorded on  
HDD while Recording to  
HDD  
(Simultaneous Recording/  
Playback)  
1 Press |PLAY during recording.  
• The programme being recorded will  
play back from the beginning.  
2 Press G REV or J FWD  
during Chasing Playback.  
• Each time you press the buttons, the  
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback  
speed changes as shown below.  
1 Press REC LIST during record-  
ing.  
(Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)  
(Approx. 2g)  
• The REC LIST (list of recorded  
programmes) is displayed.  
Example: When J FWD is pressed  
once  
2 Press '/"/\ /| to select  
programme you want to watch,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• For details on programme list  
operation, see page 54.  
Fast Forward Playback 2✕ icon  
• Press | PLAY to return to the normal  
playback speed.  
NOTE  
• Recording to HDD continues even while  
playing back another programme on the  
HDD or a DVD/CD.  
• ISTOP/LIVE is the button for stopping  
playback. Recording will not stop. To stop  
recording, press REC STOP.  
• You cannot play back a DVD-RW/R while  
recording to that same DVD-RW/R.  
• You cannot start recording during playback  
from HDD, DVD or CD.  
3 Press ISTOP/LIVE to return to  
the live broadcast which is being  
recorded.  
• Press REC STOP to watch normal  
playback.  
• For details on Chasing Playback, see  
pages 34 and 35.  
• During Simultaneous Record/Playback, the  
recording conditions may have an effect  
on playback, but recording will still be done  
correctly.  
DVD/CD Playback during  
HDD Recording  
(Simultaneous Recording/  
Playback)  
Checking the Programme  
Being Recorded during  
Playback Using the Simul-  
taneous Recording/Play-  
back Function (Picture in  
1 Press DVD during HDD recording.  
• The DVD button on the front of the  
Recorder lights up.  
2 Load a DVD or CD, then press  
Picture)  
|PLAY.  
• Press P IN P on the remote control.  
A small picture is displayed on the  
playback screen, so you can check the  
programme being recorded (or the  
programme which is stopped).  
• Picture in Picture will not work during audio  
CD playback.  
• You can watch/listen to a DVD/CD  
while continuing recording to HDD.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Menu  
How to Use the  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Allows you to call up “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”  
from REC LIST and cancel High Speed  
Dubbing Priority setting.  
• The FUNCTION MENU can be called up  
during HDD playback.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
1 Press REC LIST or select REC  
LIST in “START MENU” screen.  
• The “REC LIST” screen is displayed.  
2 Press '/"/ \ /| to select the  
title you wish to cancel High  
Speed Dubbing Priority setting  
for.  
3 Press YELLOW (D).  
• The FUNCTION MENU is displayed  
with the cursor at “HI SP DUB  
PRIORITY”.  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
5 Press \/| to select “YES”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Select “NO” if you do not wish to  
cancel High Speed Dubbing Priority  
setting.  
REC LIST  
25/12 9:54  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 16:00  
M
16: 10  
HI SP DUB PRIORITY  
CANCEL PRIORITY HIGH SPEED DUBBING  
FOR THIS TITLE? CANNOT SET AGAIN  
AFTER CANCELED.  
YES  
NO  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
6 Press EXIT to quit FUNCTION  
MENU.  
NOTE  
• This feature cancels High Speed Dubbing  
Priority setting for the title recorded with “HI  
SP DUB PRIORITY” set to “YES”. When this  
is cancelled, limitations during editing are  
relaxed, but the original state cannot be  
restored.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing (HDD/DVD)  
About Editing  
Content that can be edited and editing operations vary  
according to the recording mode.  
Editing Procedure  
Basic procedure for editing an original title  
recorded in VR mode  
Load a disc.  
Recordings on HDD, or on DVD-RW in  
VR mode  
Select the title to be edited, and edit.  
You can do various types of editing with this Recorder alone.  
For example it is possible to create a compilation of your  
favorite videos by gathering your favorite scenes from  
recorded titles, moving scenes within a specified range, or  
erasing unnecessary scenes. You can edit original videos  
you have recorded into a Play List without changing the  
content of the original videos.  
• Erasing Unnecessary Scenes from an Original Title  
(ERASE SCENE) (page 70).  
• Inputting/Changing Title Name (CHANGE TITLE  
NAME) (page 72).  
• Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) (page  
73).  
• Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) (page  
74).  
• Combining Chapters Together (COMBINE CHAPTERS)  
(page 75).  
• Disabling Title Edit and Erase (TITLE PROTECT) (page  
75).  
NOTE  
• If disc protection is set for a DVD-RW, it cannot be edited.  
ORIGINAL  
• A recorded video (title) in as is form is called an  
ORIGINAL. A single recording (from record start to stop)  
forms a single title.  
• Erasing All Titles (page 76).  
• Erasing by Selecting a Title (or Chapter) (page 76).  
PLAY LIST  
• A title created by editing based on originals is called a  
PLAY LIST. A play list can be remade any number of  
times.  
Basic procedure for editing titles recorded in VR  
mode after making a Play List  
Original  
Original  
Original  
Load a disc.  
Create a Play List.  
Play List  
1
• Creating from Original Titles (page 77).  
• Creating from Part of an Original (page 77).  
NOTE  
Select and edit the created Play List.  
• A Play List is a list which describes the playback se-  
quence of originals, and it does not actually copy the  
originals. This makes it possible to perform editing while  
using only a little disc space.  
• Erasing All Titles (page 76).  
• Erasing by Selecting a Title (or Chapter) (page 76).  
• Adding a Scene from an Original to a Play List (ADD  
SCENE) (page 78).  
Recordings on DVD-RW/R in Video  
mode  
• Changing the Title Sequence (MOVE TITLE) (page 80).  
• Erasing Unnecessary Scenes (ERASE SCENE) (page  
81).  
• Inputting/Changing Title Name (CHANGE TITLE  
NAME) (page 81).  
• Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) (page  
81).  
The following content can be edited.  
• Input (change) title name (page 72)  
• Erase title (page 76)  
NOTE  
• Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) (page  
81).  
• Combining Chapters Together (COMBINE CHAPTERS)  
(page 81).  
• ERASE TITLE for a recording in Video mode will change  
settings so that the “erased” title cannot be seen in the  
REC LIST, but this does not mean that the video is actually  
erased. (Free time on the disc will not increase. With a  
DVD-RW recorded in Video mode, free time on the disc  
will increase when the title recorded last is erased.)  
• Editing is not possible if the disc has been finalized (page  
99). With a DVD-RW, editing is possible again if finalization  
is cancelled.  
NOTE  
Editing cannot be done in the following cases.  
• Play Lists cannot be created for discs recorded in Video  
mode.  
• Play Lists cannot be created for recordings on DVD-R.  
• Finalized DVD-RWs (Video mode) cannot be edited.  
(Editing can be enabled by cancelling finalization.)  
• A Play List cannot be created from original titles/chapters  
containing a “Copy Once” enabled programme which is  
recorded on HDD.  
• Additional recording and editing can be done using only  
this Recorder until the disc is finalized.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing (HDD/DVD)  
Edit Screen  
Switching between  
Title being  
edited  
Original and Play List  
(Play Lists can be created only  
for HDD or VR mode)  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
ERASE SCENE  
MON 20:00  
20: 14  
Chapter  
being edited  
2
01  
00:00:02  
00  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
SPECIFY ERASE  
RANGE  
Switching when the Re-  
Time being  
edited  
corder power is on  
+
VIDEO Plus  
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST  
PLAY  
ENTER  
SET START POINT  
PLAYBACK  
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST in the  
stopped state. Each time this button is  
pressed, the setting will toggle between  
ORIGINAL and PLAY LIST.  
Frame being  
edited  
• There is no frame display for titles recorded  
(dubbed) with high speed dubbing priority,  
or for titles recorded (dubbed) in Video  
mode.  
REMAIN 20h0m  
HDD  
OR  
REMAIN 20h0m  
DVD-RW  
VR OR  
F I NE REMAIN 1h0m  
I
G
I
N
AL  
I
G
I
N
AL  
F I NE  
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
/
/
0
1
1
:
Seamless Playback  
:
0
0
:
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
This enables smooth playback at the  
transitions between edited video scenes.  
(However, a shift of about one second may  
arise at the transitions, and part of the scene  
may not appear.) (Page 92)  
NOTE  
• If recording is done while switched to play  
list, the system will automatically switch  
back to original.  
• Set this function by selecting: “START  
MENU”¡“OTHER SETTINGS 1” ¡ “AD-  
JUSTMENT” ¡ “OPTION SETTING” ¡  
“SEAMLESS PLAYBACK”.  
Switching at the REC LIST  
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST  
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST at the REC  
LIST. Each time this button is pressed,  
the setting will toggle between ORIGINAL  
and PLAY LIST.  
High Speed Dubbing Priority  
If a title is recorded onto HDD using high  
speed dubbing priority, editing cannot be  
done at the frame level. To perform editing at  
the frame level, set “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” to  
“NO” (pages 48, 92).  
REC LIST (DVD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
1
M
ON 16:00  
16: 10  
2
3
• Set this function by displaying “REC LIST”  
and then selecting in order of: “FUNCTION  
MENU” ¡ “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”.  
4
5
6
• If you have recorded a title with HI SP DUB  
PRIORITY set to “YES”, and you want to  
edit that title in frame units, cancel HI SP  
DUB PRIORITY (page 67).  
Switching at Edit screen  
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST  
You cannot set “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” to  
the title again once you cancel.  
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST at the  
“EDIT” screen. Each time this button is  
pressed, the setting will toggle between  
ORIGINAL and PLAY LIST.  
NOTE  
• When you perform editing like adding a  
chapter mark or erasing a scene, a slight  
discrepancy may arise between the “EDIT”  
screen and actually edited video.  
• If you play back a disc edited at the frame  
level with another DVD recorder, there may  
be a shift in the start or end point, or the  
screen may show a different thumbnail.  
EDIT(DVD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
1
M
ON 16:00  
16: 10  
2
3
4
5
6
NOTE  
• If a Play List has not been created, the  
“SELECT EDIT OR CREATE PLAY LIST”  
screen appears.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
5 Press '/" to select “ERASE  
Erasing Unnecessary  
Scenes from an Original  
SCENE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
• The selected title is paused.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
25/12 10:28  
Title (ERASE SCENE)  
M
20: 14  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
2
01  
00: 00: 00  
00  
Selects a scene from an original video and  
erase it.  
SPECIFY ERASE  
RANGE  
+
VIDEO Plus  
• To erase all titles, see page 76.  
• To erase by title (or chapter), see page 76.  
PLAY  
ENTER  
SET START POINT  
PLAYBACK  
NOTE  
• Scenes cannot be erased on DVD-RW/R  
6 Press |PLAY to start playback.  
(Video mode) discs.  
• Find the scene to be erased using  
JFWD, GREV, FSTILL/PAUSE,  
K, L, or SLOW.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
7 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the scene to be erased.  
• The erase start point is set. (Title  
playback continues.)  
1 Press START MENU to display  
“START MENU” screen.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
25/12 10:28  
M
20: 14  
2 Press '/"/ \/| to select “EDIT/  
2
01  
00:00:12  
00  
ERASE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
[
]
START MENU EDIT/ERASE  
25/12 10:28  
SPECIFY ERASE  
RANGE  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
ENTER  
SET END POINT  
OTHER  
INFORMATION  
ENTER  
• When the start point is set to near the  
beginning of a chapter, the beginning  
of the chapter will be selected as the  
start point. To make the original  
designated start point effective, set it  
again after combining up with the  
chapter just before. (page 75)  
SETTINGS 2  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
RETURN  
3 Press '/" to select “EDIT”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT/ERASE  
25/12 10:28  
DELETES SCENE,  
CREATES/EDITS PLAYLIST.  
EDIT  
8 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the end of scene to be  
erased.  
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC  
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).  
ERASE ALL TITLES  
ERASE TITLES  
ERASES SELECTED TITLES.  
• The erase end point is set. (The title  
will pause.)  
DISABLES EDIT/ERASE TITLES.  
TITLE PROTECT/OFF  
SELECT  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
25/12 10:28  
n
ENTER  
ENTER  
RETURN  
M
20: 14  
2
01  
00:00:32  
00  
• The Original Edit Title List screen  
appears.  
CONFIRM CONTENT  
AFTER ERASING?  
4 Press '/"/ \ /| to select the  
title to edit, then press Yellow  
(D) (EDIT MENU).  
n
RETURN  
CONFIRMING  
ERASE  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
• When the end point is set to near the  
end of a chapter, the end of the  
chapter will be selected as the end  
point. To make the original  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
1
M
ON 20:09  
20: 14  
2
3
designated end point effective, set it  
again after combining up with the  
chapter just after. (page 75)  
4
5
6
n
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
CHAPTER  
TITLE LIST  
EDIT MENU  
• Edit Menu Screen appears.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
Searching for the Start  
9 Press Red (B) (CONFIRMING) to  
confirm the contents.  
• The title is played back without the  
scene to be erased.  
Point and End Point Scenes  
The following playback operations are  
available when searching for the start point  
and end point scenes.  
Press Yellow (D) (ERASE) to  
erase.  
• Go to step 10.  
Playback  
• Press RETURN to cancel scene  
erase.  
• If you press |PLAY, the currently paused  
title will be played back.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Skipping to the start of a chapter  
• If the scene to be selected is in another title  
or chapter, first search for the title or  
chapter using Kor L.  
10Press \ to select “YES”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
M
20: 14  
Searching for scenes in a chapter  
• GREV and JFWD are convenient for  
searching for a scene in a chapter.  
ERASE THIS SCENE?  
Pause  
YES  
NO  
• When you reach a scene near the start  
point or end point, press FSTILL/PAUSE  
to pause. This will make it easier to find the  
scene. The start and end points may shift  
slightly.  
n
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
• Erase begins.  
When erase completes, the screen in  
step 5 appears.  
• If “C (UNDO)” is displayed, you can  
undo edit by pressing Green (C).  
• To quit scene erase, press RETURN.  
Then the edit screen appears.  
Frame Advance/Reverse  
• If you press Lafter pause, the video  
will start Frame Advance Playback. If you  
press K, it will start Frame Reverse  
Playback.  
Final selection of scene  
11Press EXIT to exit from Edit  
• To select a scene more accurately, use  
slow playback starting a little before the  
scene to be selected. This will keep you  
from going beyond the scene.  
mode.  
NOTE  
Selecting start and end points for scene  
If you press SLOW after pausing, you  
can select a scene at your leisure during  
slow playback of the video.  
erase  
• You cannot set a range shorter than 3  
seconds.  
• Once you erase a section of an original, it  
is completely erased. It cannot be restored,  
so be very careful and confirm before  
erasing.  
• Scenes can only be added and erased a  
maximum of 50 times per title.  
• If scenes have been added 51 or more  
times to a disc using another DVD recorder.  
Editing (Recording) may not function.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
6 Change Title Name.  
Inputting/Changing Title  
Name (CHANGE TITLE  
NAME)  
Input field (Displays title name.  
Can input and change title name.)  
Cursor (Displays the position  
to input characters.)  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
Displays input characters.  
• When you record, a title name including the  
date, time and channel number is auto-  
matically created.  
Select when you switch  
between capital letters  
and small letters.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
You can freely change this title name.  
• You can input up to a maximum of 64  
characters.  
To input, perform the following steps in  
order: “Select characters to be changed”  
¡ “Delete unnecessary characters  
(characters to be changed)” ¡ “Input new  
characters”.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 16:00  
M
16: 10  
PR 33 FINE 2004/4/10 16:00  
|
.
(
Í
,
A
N
À
B
O
Á
Ñ
1
'
C
P
Â
Ò
2
*
D
Q
Ã
Ó
3
/
E
R
Ä
Ô
4
[
F
S
Å
Õ
5
\
G
T
H
U
Ç
I
J
K
X
Ê
Û
-
L
Y
Ë
M
Z
Ì
?
:
!
;
)
small  
END  
V
È
Ù
8
W
É
Æ
Ö
6
Î
Ï
$
"
#
%
_
Ø
7
^
Ú
9
Ü
+
ß
>
<
|
=
}
0
]
&
{
˜
i
NOTE  
n
ENTER  
ERASE  
SELECT  
BACK SPACE  
ENTER  
BACK  
ERASE ALL  
FORWARD  
RETURN  
SPACE  
• Title names cannot be changed in finalized  
Video mode discs.  
Press '/"/ \/| to  
select the character to  
be input.  
Select when you  
complete inputting  
character.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
1 Press Red (B) or Green (C) to  
select the character to change.  
• When you want to insert characters,  
move the cursor to the position you  
want to insert by pressing Red (B) or  
Green (C).  
1 Press START MENU.  
2 Press '/" / \ /| to select “EDIT/  
ERASE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
[
]
START MENU EDIT/ERASE  
25/12 10:28  
2 Press Blue (A) to erase the  
character to change.  
World Rail  
EDIT/  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
ERASE  
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
7 Press '/" / \ /| to select the  
character to input, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/" to select “EDIT”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• Inputs character in input field.  
• To switch between capital and small  
letters, select “CAPS” or “small”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT/ERASE  
25/12 10:28  
DELETES SCENE,  
CREATES/EDITS PLAYLIST.  
EDIT  
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC  
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).  
ERASE ALL TITLES  
8 Input title letters by repeating step  
7.  
4 1 Press '/"/ \ /| to select the  
• Press Blue (A) (BACK SPACE) to  
erase text to the left of the cursor, a  
character at a time.  
title to edit.  
2
Press Yellow (D) (EDIT MENU).  
• Edit Menu screen appears.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
• Press Red (B) (BACK) to move the  
cursor back one space.  
• Press Green (C) (FORWARD) to move  
the cursor forward one space.  
• Press Yellow (D) (SPACE) to input a  
space.  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
1
MON  
16:00  
16: 10  
2
3
• The maximum number of characters  
you can input is 64.  
4
5
6
9 Press '/" / \ /| to select “END”  
and then press SET/ENTER  
After input is finished.  
n
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
CHAPTER  
TITLE LIST  
EDIT MENU  
5 1 Press '/" to select  
• The new title is set, and the screen in  
step 5 displays.  
“CHANGE TITLE NAME”.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 16:00  
ERASE SCENE  
25/12 10:28  
Press Green (C) (UNDO) to  
return to the previously set title.  
• The title returns to original name.  
• Operate according to the instructions  
of the screen.  
M
16: 10  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
CHANGE TITLE NAME.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Title Name Change screen appears.  
10Press EXIT to quit editing.  
• Edit mode will terminate.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
5 1 Press '/" to select  
Changing Thumbnail  
“CHANGE THUMBNAIL”.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
ERASE SCENE  
25/12 10:28  
(CHANGE THUMBNAIL)  
M
20: 14  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
1
00  
00:00: 00  
00  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
Changes the still frame picture displayed at  
the Thumbnail screen of the REC LIST to your  
favorite scene within the title.  
SELECT SCENE FOR  
THUMBNAIL  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
6 Press |PLAY to start playback.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
25/12 10:28  
1 Press START MENU.  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
SCENE ERASE  
M
20: 14  
2 Press '/" / \ /| to select “EDIT/  
ERASE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
1
01  
00:00 : 12  
14  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTERS  
SELECT SCENE FOR  
THUMBNAIL  
[
]
START MENU EDIT/ERASE  
25/12 10:28  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
• Find the scene you want to use as a  
thumbnail using JFWD, GREV,  
FSTILL/PAUSE, K, L, or  
SLOW.  
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
OTHER  
INFORMATION  
ENTER  
SETTINGS 2  
7 Press SET/ENTER when you  
reach the scene you want to use  
as a thumbnail.  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
RETURN  
3 Press '/" to select “EDIT”,  
• Playback is paused.  
then press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
25/12 10:28  
EDIT/ERASE  
25/12 10:28  
M
20: 14  
DELETES SCENE,  
CREATES/EDITS PLAYLIST.  
1
01  
00 :00:41  
12  
EDIT  
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC  
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).  
ERASE ALL TITLES  
ERASE TITLES  
PUT THIS  
SCENE IN THE  
THUMBNAIL?  
ERASES SELECTED TITLES.  
DISABLES EDIT/ERASE TITLES.  
TITLE PROTECT/OFF  
8 1 If this is the screen you want,  
select “YES” by pressing \/|.  
• If you select “NO”, you can return to  
step 5 and select the scene again.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• The Original Edit Title List Screen  
appears.  
4 Press '/" / \ /| to select the  
title to edit, then press Yellow  
(D) (EDIT MENU).  
• The new Thumbnail screen is set, and  
the system returns to the screen in  
step 5.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
25/12 10:28  
Press Green (C) (UNDO) to  
return to the previously set  
thumbnail.  
• Operate according to the instructions  
of the screen.  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
1
M
ON 20:09  
20: 14  
2
3
4
5
6
9 Press EXIT to quit Thumbnail  
edit.  
n
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
CHAPTER  
TITLE LIST  
EDIT MENU  
• Edit mode will terminate.  
• Edit Menu screen appears.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
6 Press |PLAY to start playback.  
Making Sections in a Title  
(DIVIDE CHAPTER)  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
ERASE SCENE  
M
20: 14  
2
01  
00:00:01  
04  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
VR MODE  
Divides a title into multiple chapters and  
make editing and dubbing of chapter as unit  
easier.  
SELECT POSITION  
TO DIVIDE  
THIS CHAPTER  
+
VIDEO Plus  
• You can set chapter divisions by pressing  
CHAPTER MARK (under the cover)  
during recording or playback.  
• Find the scene to erase using  
JFWD, GREV, FSTILL/PAUSE,  
K, L, or SLOW on the  
remote comtrol.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
7 Press SET/ENTER at the point  
where you want to divide.  
1 Press START MENU.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
25/12 10:28  
2 Press '/" / \ /| to select “EDIT/  
ERASE”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
M
20: 14  
ERASE SCENE  
1
01  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
00:00:12  
04  
[
]
START MENU EDIT/ERASE  
25/12 10:28  
DIVIDE CHAPTER?  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
YES  
NO  
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
8 Press \/| to select “YES”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 2  
INFORMATION  
• To continue dividing, repeat steps 5  
to 7.  
3 Press '/" to select “EDIT”, then  
To cancel a chapter division,  
press Green (C) (UNDO).  
• Operate according to the instructions  
on the screen.  
press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT/ERASE  
25/12 10:28  
DELETES SCENE,  
CREATES/EDITS PLAYLIST.  
EDIT  
9 Press EXIT to quit editing.  
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC  
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).  
ERASE ALL TITLES  
ERASE TITLES  
• Edit mode will terminate.  
ERASES SELECTED TITLES.  
NOTE  
DISABLES EDIT/ERASE TITLES.  
TITLE PROTECT/OFF  
• Divide a chapter to make it 3 or more  
seconds. You cannot divide a chapter into a  
section which is less than 3 seconds.  
4 Press '/" / \ /| to select the  
title to edit, then press Yellow  
(D) (EDIT MENU).  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
1
M
ON 20:09  
20: 14  
2
3
4
5
6
5 Press '/" to select “DIVIDE  
CHAPTER”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
M
20: 14  
ERASE SCENE  
2
01  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
00:00: 00  
04  
SELECT POSITION  
TO DIVIDE  
THIS CHAPTER  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
Combining Chapters  
Together  
Disabling Title Edit and  
Erase (TITLE PROTECT)  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
(COMBINE CHAPTERS)  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
Disables edit and erase so you cannot  
mistakenly change or erase the content of a  
title.  
Lets you safely save a disc for which editing  
is in progress.  
• This operation will not work with Video  
mode discs.  
• Titles created with Play List (page 77)  
cannot be protected.  
Combines two adjacent chapters into a single  
chapter.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
NOTE  
• You cannot combine chapters automati-  
cally recorded when a scene was erased.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in “START  
MENU” screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in “START  
MENU” screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
2 Press '/" to select “EDIT”,  
2 Press '/" to select “TITLE  
PROTECT/OFF”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
then press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/" / \ /| to select the  
title you wish to edit.  
3 Press '/" / \ /| to select the  
title to protect, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
4 Press Red (B) (CHAPTER) to  
select Chapter Thumbnail screen.  
• Each time the button is pressed, the  
setting toggles between “PROTECT”  
and “UNPROTECT”.  
5 Press '/" / \ /| to select the  
chapter to combine, then press  
Yellow (D) (EDIT MENU).  
TITLE PROTECT OR NOT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
1
2
3
TITLE INFO: 13/10  
1
W
ED 16:00  
16: 10  
2
3
4
5
6
4
5
6
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
EDIT MENU  
TITLE  
6 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The protect mark  
protected titles.  
(The protect mark can be confirmed  
at either the “REC LIST” screen or  
“EDIT” screen.)  
is attached to  
7 Press '/" to select combine  
procedure you prefer, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• Select from: “COMBINE W/PREV”,  
“COMBINE W/NEXT” or “DON’T  
COMBINE”.  
• If you select “COMBINE W/PREV” or  
“COMBINE W/NEXT”, the two  
chapters will join, and Chapter  
Thumbnail screen is displayed.  
• If you select “DON’T COMBINE”, the  
previous screen displays.  
4 Press EXIT to exit from Edit  
mode.  
To Cancel Title Protect  
1 Select the title protected in step 3  
above, and press SET/ENTER.  
• Title protect is cancelled, and the  
protect mark disappears.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 16:00  
COMBINE CHAPTERS  
25/12 10:28  
M
16: 10  
NOTE  
COMBINE W/PREV  
• If “DVD DISC PROTECTION” is set for a  
DVD-RW (VR mode) disc, protection cannot  
be cancelled for individual titles. Cancel  
“DVD DISC PROTECTION” (page 93).  
COMBINE W/PREV CHAP  
COMBINE W/NEXT  
COMBINE W/NEXT CHAP  
DON'T COMBINE  
DO NOT COMBINE CHAPS.  
2 Press EXIT to exit from Edit  
mode.  
8 Press EXIT to exit from Edit  
mode.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)  
Erasing All Titles  
Erasing by Selecting a  
Title (or Chapter)  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
This erases the entire contents of a HDD or  
DVD-RW. (Except titles for which title protect  
has been set.)  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
Allows you to select titles to erase, and erase  
them in a batch.  
You can erase the following:  
• HDD (ORIGINAL):  
• When erasing original titles:  
If original titles are erased, those titles will  
also be erased from play lists.  
• When erasing play lists:  
Even if play lists are erased, the original  
titles will not be erased.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Erases all titles recorded on the HDD.  
When originals are erased, play lists are  
also erased.  
• HDD (PLAY LIST):  
Erases all play lists created on the HDD.  
Even if play lists are erased, the original  
titles are not erased.  
NOTE  
• Up to a maximum of 20 titles (chapters)  
can be selected at one time.  
• DVD (ORIGINAL):  
• When a Video mode disc is finalized, you  
can no longer select and erase titles.  
• You cannot erase chapters in DVD-RW/R  
discs (Video mode).  
Erases all titles recorded on DVD. When  
originals are erased, play lists are also  
erased.  
• DVD (PLAY LIST):  
Erases all play lists created on DVD. Even if  
play lists are erased, the original titles are  
not erased.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
NOTE  
• When a Video mode disc is finalized, you  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in “START  
MENU” screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
can no longer erase all titles.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
2 Press '/" to select “ERASE  
TITLES”, then press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/" / \ /| to select titles  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in “START  
MENU” screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
to erase.  
• If you press Red (B) (CHAPTER), the  
screen will switch to the chapter  
thumbnail display so you can select  
and erase chapters.  
2 Press '/" to select “ERASE  
ALL TITLES”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
• If there are other titles (chapters) you  
wish to erase, select with ' /"/ \/|  
and press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/" to select what you  
want to erase, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
5 Press Yellow (D) (ERASE).  
ERASE ALL TITLES  
25/12 10:28  
6 Press \ /| to select “YES”.  
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW TO ERASE ALL TITLES.  
•
Once a title (chapter) has been erased,  
it cannot be restored. Carefully confirm  
before executing erase.  
HDD (ORIGINAL)  
HDD (PLAYLIST)  
• If you select “NO” and enter, operate  
from step 4 again.  
4 Press \ /| to select “YES”, then  
7 Press SET/ENTER.  
press SET/ENTER.  
• Carefully confirm before executing  
erase.  
•
All selected titles (chapters) are erased.  
• To cancel erase, press Green (C)  
(CNL ERASE).  
• If you select “NO” and enter, the  
screen in step 3 appears.  
• Operate according to the instructions  
on the screen.  
5 Press SET/ENTER.  
8
Press EXIT to exit from Edit mode.  
• All titles (or play lists) are erased, and  
the screen in step 3 appears.  
To restore the erased content, press  
Green (C) (CNL ERASE). Operate  
according to the instructions on the  
screen. (Note: You can only undo  
once, to the state immediately before  
the last erase.)  
6 Press EXIT to exit from Edit  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
mode.  
76  
                                                              
                                                              
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)  
5
1
Press '/" to select “COPY  
Creating a Play List  
TITLE/CHAPTER”.  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
• “REC LIST” (Thumbnail) screen of the  
original appears.  
VR MODE  
You can create a Play List by copying a title  
or chapter units from an original. Also you can  
select your favorite scenes from originals, and  
compile them into a Play List.  
6 1 Press '/"/ \ /| to select title  
to copy.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
NOTE  
+
VIDEO Plus  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
1
M
ON 20:09  
20: 14  
• Operations like “COPY TITLE/CHAPTER”  
and “COPY SPECIFIED SCENE” do not  
actually copy the original titles. These  
operations merely write the information  
“make this original title a title in the play  
list”. Therefore, you can edit without  
decreasing free space in the disc or  
touching the original titles.  
• When creating a play list from original titles,  
the original title’s thumbnail and chapter  
mark information are not copied.  
• You cannot create a play list of “Copy  
Once” titles (programme) recorded on  
HDD.  
2
3
4
5
6
• To select a chapter, press Red (B)  
(CHAPTER).  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The selected title (chapter) becomes  
a Play List title.  
Creating from Part of an  
Original  
You can select a desired scene from an  
original title, and make it into a Play List title.  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
1 Perform steps 1-4 of “Creating  
from Original Titles” in the left  
column.  
Creating from Original  
Titles  
Makes a single original title into a play list  
title.  
2 1 Press ' /" to select “COPY  
SPECIFIED SCENE”.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in “START  
MENU” screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
3 Press '/" / \ /| to select title to  
copy, then press SET/ENTER.  
• To select from a chapter, press Red  
(B) (CHAPTER) and select the  
chapter.  
2 Press '/" to select “EDIT”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
4 Press |PLAY to start playback.  
• Find the scene to copy using  
FSTILL/PAUSE, JFWD, GREW,  
K, L, or SLOW.  
3 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
the “PLAY LIST” screen.  
• The screen switches to the Play List  
Edit Screen.  
• There still is no title at this point, so a  
“NEW” title frame with no image is  
displayed.  
• To create a new Play List later, select  
the “NEW” title frame.  
5 Press SET/ENTER at the place  
where you want to start copying.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
CREATE NEW  
25/12 10:28  
M
20: 14  
2
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
25/12 10:28  
01  
SELECT EDIT OR CREATE PLAYLIST  
00: 00: 12  
00  
SPECIFY A RANGE  
TO COPY.  
NEW  
ENTER  
SET END POINT  
• If you fast reverse to a scene prior to  
the start point, the start point will be  
cancelled.  
4 Press SET/ENTER.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
25/12 10:28  
• When the start point is set to near the  
beginning of a chapter, the beginning  
of the chapter will be selected as the  
start point. To make the original  
designated start point effective, set it  
again after combining up with the  
chapter just before. (page 75)  
SPECIFY THE RANGE TO SET PLAYLIST  
FROM THE ORIGINAL THEN CREATE PLAYLIST.  
COPY TITLE/CHAPTER  
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT.  
COPY SPECIFIED SCENE  
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO  
AND ADD IT.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)  
6 Find the place where you want to  
Adding a Scene from an  
Original to a Play List  
(ADD SCENE)  
end copying, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• If you press RETURN, you can  
reselect the start point.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:00  
CREATE NEW  
25/12 10:28  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
VR MODE  
M
20: 14  
Adds video selected from an original to the  
end of play list titles.  
1
07  
00: 00: 32  
14  
+
VIDEO Plus  
NOTE  
CONFIRM CONTENT?  
• The selected scene cannot be added if  
adding it will make the title longer than 12  
hours.  
• Scenes can be added as long as the  
length of the title after adding is less than  
the maximum of 12 hours.  
• When the end point is set to near the  
end of a chapter, the end of the  
chapter will be selected as the end  
point. To make the original  
designated end point effective, set it  
again after linking up with the chapter  
just before. (page 75)  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
7 Press Red (B) (CONFIRMING) to  
confirm the content.  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in “START  
MENU” screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
Press Yellow (D) (CREATE) to  
execute copy.  
Go to step 8.  
• You can reselect the end point by  
pressing RETURN.  
2 Press '/" to select “EDIT”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
8 1 Press \ /| to select “YES”.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
3 1 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST  
to switch to “PLAY LIST”  
screen.  
SAVE AS A NEW PLAYLIST?  
2 Press '/"/ \ /| to select title  
to edit.  
YES  
NO  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
25/12 10:28  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
MON 20:09  
20: 14  
• One play list title is created.  
NOTE  
1
2
NEW  
Selecting start or end point to add a scene.  
• You cannot set a range shorter than 3  
seconds.  
3
4
5
3 Press Yellow (D) (EDIT  
MENU).  
4 Press '/" to select “ADD  
SCENE” then press SET/  
ENTER.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
M
20: 14  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
ADD SCENE  
ADD CHAPTER/TITLE  
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT  
MOVE TITLE  
SPECIFY SCENE TO ADD  
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO AND  
ADD IT  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
Continued on Next Page |||  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)  
• When the start point is set to near the  
5 Adding a Title or Chap-  
beginning of a chapter, the beginning  
of the chapter will be selected as the  
start point. To make the original  
designated start point effective, set it  
again after combining up with the  
chapter just before. (page 75)  
ter  
1 Select “ADD CHAPTER/TITLE”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
2 Select a title (chapter) at the  
title (chapter) list, then press  
SET/ENTER. Go to step 9.  
8 Press SET/ENTER at the end of  
the scene you want to add.  
• Press RETURN to reselect the start  
point of the scene. You can press  
RETURN to reselect the end point  
even after it is already set.  
Specifying and Adding a  
+
VIDEO Plus  
Scene  
• Select “SPECIFY SCENE TO  
ADD”, then press SET/ENTER.  
Go to step 6.  
ERASE SCENE  
2
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
01  
25/12 10:28  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
00:00:32  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
09  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
ERASE SCENE  
MON 20:09  
20: 14  
ADD SCENE  
MOVE TITLE  
CONFIRM CONTENT?  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
ADD SCENE  
ADD CHAPTER/TITLE  
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT  
n
RETURN  
CONFIRMING  
MOVE TITLE  
ADD  
SPECIFY SCENE TO ADD  
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO AND  
ADD IT  
• When the end point is set to near the  
end of a chapter, the end of the  
chapter will be selected as the end  
point. To make the original  
designated end point effective, set it  
again after combining up with the  
chapter just before. (page 75)  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
6 Press '/"/ \ /| to select title  
(chapter) to edit, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
• The selected title (chapter) pauses.  
9 Press Red (B) (CONFIRMING) to  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:09  
ERASE SCENE  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
ADD SCENE  
25/12 10:28  
confirm the content.  
M
20: 14  
Press Yellow (D) (ADD) to add.  
• If you press Red (B) (CONFIRMING),  
you can test play the added scene,  
from the start point to the end point. It  
may take about one minute for the  
confirm screen to appear.  
2
01  
00: 00:00  
04  
MOVE TITLE  
SPECIFY RANGE  
TO ADD.  
• Press Yellow (D) (ADD) to add.  
PLAY  
ENTER  
SET START POINT  
PLAYBACK  
101 Press \ /| to select “YES”.  
7 1 Press |PLAY to start playback.  
• Find the scene to add using FSTILL/  
PAUSE, JFWD, GREV, K,  
L, or SLOW.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
• The scene is added after the selected  
title, and stored as a new title of the  
play list.  
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
25/12 10:28  
11Press EXIT to exit from EDIT  
TITLE INFO: 4/10 ON 20:00  
M
20: 14  
mode.  
ERASE SCENE  
2
01  
00: 00:12  
00  
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
ADD SCENE  
• A chapter mark is automatically set at  
the start point where the scene is  
added.  
MOVE TITLE  
SPECIFY RANGE  
TO ADD.  
NOTE  
• When adding a scene, select a scene  
which continues for at least 3 seconds.  
Scenes shorter than 3 seconds cannot be  
added.  
• Scenes can only be added and erased a  
maximum of 50 times per title.  
• If you press G REV or Kand reverse  
beyond the start point after setting a start  
point, the start point will cancel.  
• If scenes have been added or erased 51 or  
more times to a single title in a disc using  
another DVD recorder, Editing (Recording)  
may not function.  
PLAY  
ENTER  
SET START POINT  
PLAYBACK  
2 Press SET/ENTER at the start  
point of the scene you want to  
add.  
ERASE SCENE  
2
CHANGE TITLE NAME  
01  
CHANGE THUMBNAIL  
00:00: 32  
DIVIDE CHAPTER  
ADD SCENE  
MOVE TITLE  
09  
SPECIFY RANGE  
TO ADD.  
ENTER  
SET END POINT  
• If you fast reverse to a scene prior to  
the start point, the start point will be  
cancelled.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)  
6 Press SET/ENTER.  
• If a point prior to the selected title is  
selected as the destination, the title  
will move to the point immediately  
prior to the selected title.  
Changing the Title  
Sequence (MOVE TITLE)  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
• Press Green (C) (UNDO) to restore to  
the state before the movement.  
Operate according to the instructions  
on the screen.  
Freely changes the sequence of titles.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
25/12 10:28  
SELECT EDIT OR CREATE PLAYLIST  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
25/12 10:28  
+
VIDEO Plus  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
1
2
TITLE INFO: 6/10  
1
W
ED 16:00  
16: 10  
NEW  
2
3
3
4
5
4
5
6
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
TITLE LIST  
CHAPTER  
EDIT MENU  
n
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
TITLE LIST  
ENTER  
Before Starting Editing  
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to  
be edited.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
1
M
ON 16:00  
16: 10  
1 Select “EDIT/ERASE” in “START  
MENU” screen, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
2
3
4
5
6
2 Press '/" to select “EDIT”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
n
RETURN  
UNDO  
TITLE LIST  
3 1 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST  
to switch to “PLAY LIST”  
screen.  
Example: If Title 3 is selected and the  
destination cursor is set to Title 1, Title 3  
is moved to the spot in front of Title 1.  
2 Press '/"/ \ /| to select title  
to edit.  
• If a point after the selected title is  
selected as the destination, the title  
will move to the point immediately  
after the selected title.  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 4/10  
MON 16:00  
16: 10  
1
2
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
25/12 10:28  
NEW  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 7/10  
1
T
HU 20:09  
2
20: 10  
3
4
5
3
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
TITLE LIST  
CHAPTER  
EDIT MENU  
4
5
6
3 Press Yellow (D) (EDIT  
n
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
TITLE LIST  
ENTER  
MENU).  
4 Press '/" to select “MOVE  
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE”, then press SET/ENTER.  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
TITLE INFO: 6/10 ED 16:00  
W
16: 10  
5 Press '/" / \ /| to select the  
thumbnail to move the title to.  
1
2
3
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)  
25/12 10:28  
TITLE: PR33 F INE  
4
5
6
TITLE INFO: 8/10  
1
F
RI 16:00  
2
16: 10  
3
n
RETURN  
TITLE LIST  
UNDO  
4
5
6
Example: If Title 3 is selected and the  
destination cursor is set to Title 4, Title 3  
is moved to the spot after Title 4.  
n
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
TITLE LIST  
7 Press EXIT to exit from EDIT  
Selected title  
Cursor on the  
thumbnail to move  
the selected title to  
mode.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)  
Erasing Unnecessary  
Making Sections in a Title  
Scenes (ERASE SCENE)  
(DIVIDE CHAPTER)  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
HDD  
Selects and erases unnecessary scenes.  
Even if you erase a scene in a play list, this  
will not affect the original video.  
Divides a title into multiple chapters. This  
makes editing and dubbing in chapter units  
more convenient.  
+
1 Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/  
ERASE” in START MENU, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
1 Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/  
ERASE” in START MENU, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
VIDEO Plus  
• The Thumbnail screen appears.  
• The Thumbnail screen appears.  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to 2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
display “PLAY LIST” (Thumbnail)  
screen.  
display “PLAY LIST” (Thumbnail)  
screen.  
3 Erase the scene using the same  
operation used for erasing an  
original scene (step 4 on page 70-  
step 11 on page 71).  
3 Divide a title into chapters using  
the same operation used for  
chapter division of originals  
(steps 4 -9 on page 74).  
Combining Chapters  
Together  
Inputting/Changing  
Title Name  
(COMBINE CHAPTERS)  
(CHANGE TITLE NAME)  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
HDD  
This lets you combine two adjacent chapters  
into a single chapter.  
You can input up to 64 characters.  
1 Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/  
ERASE” in START MENU, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
1 Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/  
ERASE” in START MENU, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• The Thumbnail screen appears.  
• The Thumbnail screen appears.  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
display “PLAY LIST” (Thumbnail)  
screen.  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
display “PLAY LIST” (Thumbnail)  
screen.  
3 Change or input the title name  
using the same operation used for  
changing or inputting an original  
title (steps 4 -10 on page 72).  
3 Combine chapters using the same  
operation used for chapter  
combination of originals (steps 3  
-8, left column on page 75).  
Changing Thumbnail  
NOTE  
• You cannot combine chapters automati-  
cally recorded when a scene was erased,  
or chapters recorded due to adding (with  
ADD SCENE).  
(CHANGE THUMBNAIL)  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
VR MODE  
Changes the image of title displayed in REC  
LIST to a scene you like in the title.  
1 Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/  
ERASE” in START MENU, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
• The Thumbnail screen appears.  
2 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to  
display “PLAY LIST” (Thumbnail)  
screen.  
3 Change the thumbnail using the  
same operation used for changing  
an original thumbnail (steps 4-9  
on page 73).  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying High Quality Sounds  
Playing 2 Channel Audio with an  
Playing Dolby Digital,  
DTS or MPEG Audio with a  
Digital Connection  
Analogue Connection  
The Recorder  
• Connecting an amplifier with a Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG  
Audio digital surround processor or a Dolby Digital/DTS/  
MPEG Audio digital surround amplifier to the Recorder’s  
coaxial or optical DIGITAL AUDIO Output jack (terminal)  
provides richer, more powerful audio play.  
• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround audio, select DTS audio at  
the disc menu during DVD playback, or select DTS audio  
using the AUDIO button (under the cover) of the remote  
control.  
To AUDIO  
Output jacks  
(Red)  
(White)  
I Connection to a processor or amplifier with an optical  
or coaxial digital input jack (terminal)  
Audio cable  
(commercially available)  
The Recorder  
To amplifier  
audio input jacks  
(Red)  
(White)  
DIGITAL AUDIO Output  
To DIGITAL  
AUDIO Output  
OPTICAL terminal  
COAXIAL jack  
To DIGITAL  
Audio equipment, etc.  
AUDIO Output  
COAXIAL jack  
Jack and Plug Colours  
Audio Left: White  
Audio Right: Red  
Optical digital cable  
(commercially available)  
or  
Coaxial digital cable  
(commercially available)  
NOTE  
To coaxial digital  
input jack  
To optical digital  
input terminal  
• When connecting audio equipment using analogue  
connection, we recommend that you set “DD OUTPUT  
LEVEL” to “NO” (see page 91).  
If you set to “YES”, audio may sound abnormal during  
disc playback.  
Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG  
Audio processor or amplifier  
Important!  
• When using this connection, set “DIGITAL AUDIO  
OUTPUT” to “BIT STREAM” (see page 91).  
NOTE  
• To play a disc recorded with DTS, you need to use DTS  
processor or amplifier.  
• This connection is not possible if the processor or  
amplifier to which you want to connect does not have an  
optical or coaxial digital input jack (terminal).  
• Refer to the operation manual for the processor or  
amplifier for information about connecting to it.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enjoying High Quality Sounds  
Digital Connection to an MD Recorder or  
Other Audio Equipment without a Dolby  
Digital Decoder  
Playing 2 Channel Audio with a  
Digital Connection  
The Recorder  
Audio CD or Video CD  
• You can enjoy these discs by playing them back by the  
ordinary playback procedure. (The normal audio output  
is not played back for discs recorded with DTS.)  
DVD Video Disc  
• There is no audio signal generated for DVD video discs  
recorded with DTS. A processor or amplifier equipped  
with a DTS Surround decoder function is required to enjoy  
DTS audio.  
To DIGITAL  
AUDIO Output  
OPTICAL terminal  
DIGITAL AUDIO Output  
COAXIAL jack  
To DIGITAL  
AUDIO Output  
COAXIAL jack  
Optical digital cable  
(commercially available)  
or  
Coaxial digital cable  
(commercially available)  
To optical digital  
input terminal  
To coaxial digital  
input jack  
Audio equipment with an  
optical or coaxial digital  
input terminal  
Important!  
• When using this connection, set “DIGITAL AUDIO  
OUTPUT” to “PCM” (see page 91).  
Digital Connection to an MD Recorder to Record a CD  
• When you are using a digital connection to record  
the contents of a CD to an MD, the track numbers of  
the CD may not match the track numbers recorded  
to the MD.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording from External Equipment  
Input of Video, Audio and Data Signals  
Æ Date and time data as well as the contents of cassette  
memory cannot be recorded with this Recorder.  
Æ Video and audio signals of protected material or  
“Copy Once” material cannot be recorded.  
Æ Monaural audio cannot be input through the DV IN  
terminal.  
Recording from a Digital  
Camcorder Using i.LINK  
DVD-RW  
VR MODE  
DVD-RW  
VIDEO MODE  
HDD  
DVD-R  
• When this Recorder is connected with a DV-format  
camcorder using a DV cable, you can record and edit  
with minimal deterioration of picture and sound quality  
using a digital signal.  
• You can also display an operation panel for digital  
camcorder control on the screen, and operate using the  
buttons on the panel. This allows easy recording onto  
disc. Record after first performing “DV SETTING” (page  
93) at the START MENU.  
* i.LINK is a function that lets you control other equipment  
by input and output of video, audio, data and control  
signals between equipment having an i.LINK terminal.  
* i.LINK refers to the IEEE1394-1995 industry specification  
Audio Mode  
Digital camcorders typically have the following two audio  
modes.  
16-bit (48 kHz)  
Although this yields high sound quality, only one stereo  
audio signal can be processed.  
12-bit (32 kHz)  
Two stereo signals can be processed. In general,  
overdubbed audio is recorded in Stereo 2.  
Æ This Recorder allows listening or recording of either  
Stereo 1 or Stereo 2 audio if the input audio is in the 12-bit  
audio mode.  
Æ This Recorder is unable to process 44.1 kHz input audio  
signals.  
and extensions thereof. The  
compliant with the i.LINK standard.  
* i.LINK is a trademark.  
logo is used for products  
NOTE  
Connecting a Digital Camcorder  
• The DV IN terminal of this Recorder only enables input of  
DV-format camcorders (DVC-SD signals). It is not  
compatible with satellite receivers or Digital VHS video  
recorders since they employ a different format.  
• To connect the Recorder with a digital camcorder, set  
digital camcorder POWER to “PLAY (Video side)”, and  
connect while in the stopped state. If the DV is connected  
when POWER is set to “RECORD (Camera side)”, or  
when tape has been played back, the DV link will not  
work correctly.  
Using the DV IN Terminal (i.LINK)  
Refer to the user’s manual provided with the camcorder for  
information on the procedure for connecting the camcorder  
with this Recorder.  
The Recorder  
• There are some digital camcorders which cannot be  
operated using the On-Screen Control Panel of this  
Recorder, even if you set “DV LINK” under “DV SETTING”  
to “ON”. In cases like this, set “DV LINK” to “OFF”. (page  
93)  
• When this Recorder is connected to a camcorder  
equipped with a DV terminal, the signal may not be input  
to this Recorder depending on the camcorder. When this  
happens, use an analogue connection (page 86).  
• The DV IN terminal is not compatible with connection to a  
PC.  
To DV IN terminal  
Digital camcorder  
To DV terminal  
DV cable  
(commercially available)  
Before connecting, set the power  
switch of the digital camcorder to  
“Video (Playback)” and stop the  
camcorder.  
• This Recorder cannot be controlled from other equipment  
connected to the DV IN terminal.  
• Only one camcorder can be connected to this Recorder  
using the DV IN terminal.  
• Connect this Recorder and the camcorder directly. The  
DV signal will not be input if the camcorder is connected  
to this Recorder through other equipment with a DV IN  
terminal.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording from External Equipment  
Recording with This Recorder (DV  
Capture)  
Important!  
Abnormal images may be recorded or the Recorder  
enters the Pause mode when any of the following  
1 Press HDD or DVD to select the media to  
occur during DV capture.  
record to.  
• When the connected equipment plays back a portion  
where nothing is recorded or video containing a copy  
guard signal.  
• When the DV cable is disconnected or the camcorder  
power is turned off during DV capture.  
• When playback from the camcorder is stopped.  
2 Select audio to be input from the digital  
camcorder.  
• Before starting recording, check setting of “DV  
AUDIO INPUT” using “DV SETTING” (page 93).  
3 Press INPUT to select “DV”.  
• The setting will cycle as follows each time you press  
the button.  
L1 (IN 1) L2 (IN 2)  
TV channels DV (DV IN) L3 (IN 3)  
4 Perform digital camcorder playback.  
• Press ' /" / \ /| to select the desired button on  
the On-screen Control Panel, then press SET/  
ENTER to operate.  
When “DV LINK” is set to “ON”  
DV LINK (ENABLES CONTROL OF DV CAMCORDER)  
PLAYBACK  
00 : 00 : 10  
PLAYBACK  
ENTER  
EXIT  
EXIT  
SELECT  
ENTER  
Select | on the On-screen Control Panel to  
start playback, then press SET/ENTER.  
• If you press EXIT on the remote control, the On-  
screen Control Panel will disappear. To display it  
again, press ON SCREEN (under the cover).  
5 Press GREC when you reach the scene you  
want to start recording.  
• The Recorder will start recording.  
6 Press REC PAUSE when you want to pause  
recording.  
• Press REC PAUSE again to cancel pause.  
7 Press REC STOP when you want to stop  
(end) recording.  
NOTE  
• Material protected with a copy guard cannot be recorded.  
• Date and time data as well as the contents of cassette  
memory cannot be recorded.  
• There are some digital camcorders which cannot be  
operated using the On-screen Control Panel, even when  
“DV LINK” is set to “ON”. In such cases, set it to “OFF”.  
(See page 93.)  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording from External Equipment  
1 Press HDD or DVD to select the media to  
Recording from a Camcorder  
(VCR) Using an Analogue  
Connection  
record to.  
2 Select audio to be input from the external  
device.  
To record to HDD  
DVD-RW  
DVD-RW  
HDD  
DVD-R  
• Switch audio of the external device to the audio you  
want to capture.  
VR MODE  
VIDEO MODE  
Material from a camcorder can be recorded with this  
Recorder using an analog connection. You can capture  
video by connecting a camcorder or VCR to the LINE IN 1,  
2 or 3 jacks of this Recorder.  
To record to DVD  
• Select audio using “EXTERNAL AUDIO” (page 87).  
• Select “L CH” or “R CH” with “VIDEO MODE  
AUDIO” (page 87) to record in Video mode.  
NOTE  
3 Press INPUT to set the connection to exter-  
nal input channel (example: L3).  
• The setting will cycle as follows each time you press  
the button.  
• More vivid images can be viewed by connecting the S-  
VIDEO input jack on this Recorder with the S-video output  
jack on the camcorder using an S-video cable.  
• Some camcorders may be required to be connected  
using a special cable.  
L1 (IN 1) L2 (IN 2)  
• Refer to the operation manual provided with the  
camcorder for further information on the procedure for  
connecting the camcorder.  
• Material protected with a copy guard cannot be re-  
corded. It may be impossible to get the correct video,  
even if you just view without recording.  
• Date and time as well as the contents of cassette memory  
cannot be recorded with this Recorder.  
• If you input video from an external device to this Re-  
corder, there will be a slight difference in image quality  
between the video viewed from the external device  
directly on the TV, and video viewed as external input to  
the Recorder.  
TV channels DV (DV IN) L3 (IN 3)  
4 Play back the camcorder or VCR.  
5 Press GREC when you reach the scene you  
want to start recording.  
• The Recorder starts recording.  
6 Press REC PAUSE when you want to pause  
recording.  
• Press REC PAUSE again to cancel Pause mode.  
7 Press REC STOP when you want to stop  
(end) recording.  
Example:  
To record by connecting a camcorder to the LINE IN 3  
jacks.  
The Recorder  
To S-VIDEO  
Input jack  
To VIDEO/AUDIO  
Input jacks  
S-video cable  
(commercially  
available)  
Video/audio cable  
(provided with camcorder or  
commercially available)  
To S-video  
output jack  
To video/audio  
output jack  
Camcorder  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
Functions under OTHER SETTINGS 1  
This section explains various settings relating to recording and playback which can be used to get more out of the Recorder.  
• For details about each setting, see the corresponding pages.  
REC. FUNCTION s page 87  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING s page 89  
ADJUSTMENT s page 91  
REC. FUNCTION  
AUTO CHAPTER  
• This sets the interval of automatic chapter setting during recording.  
• Chapter marks set on a DVD-RW/R in Video mode cannot be combined by editing, so  
select an appropriate interval.  
10 (10 min interval)  
15 (15 min interval)  
30 (30 min interval)  
-- (off)  
EXACT RECORDING  
• This function works when timer recording (VIDEO Plus+/Timer Programme) onto DVD-  
RW/R. If disc capacity runs low, and the programme cannot be recorded to the end,  
this function will automatically change the recording mode so the programme will fit.  
(The recording mode set in above situation will have lower picture quality than the  
originally set recording mode.)  
YES  
NO  
• If there is very little disc capacity left on the disc, the programme may not fit even if  
Exact Recording is set.  
• When recording in EP or MN1 mode, there is no lower recording mode, so Exact  
Recording will not work.  
REC. AUDIO FORMAT  
• PCM: If you record by setting the recording mode to “FINE” or “MN32”, you can record  
audio as PCM (uncompressed) audio which can be played back with 2ch audio  
equipment.  
PCM  
MPEG  
* This will not work when recording with the recording mode set to anything other than  
“FINE” or “MN32”.  
* Recording is done with a recording mode whose image quality is slightly lower than  
FINE mode recorded with the “MPEG” setting.  
• When making a PCM recording of bilingual sound, only the audio selected in “VIDEO  
MODE AUDIO” is recorded.  
• MPEG: Records audio as MPEG audio.  
EXTERNAL AUDIO  
• This selects audio to be input from an external device.  
STEREO  
* Be sure to always select “BILINGUAL” when recording bilingual sound. If you select BILINGUAL  
“STEREO” when recording, the audio for the left channel (“L CH”) and right channel  
(“R CH”) will be heard together during playback.  
* When recording bilingual sound, you can switch between the left channel (“L CH”)  
and right channel (“R CH”) during playback in VR mode. In Video mode, only the  
audio set in “VIDEO MODE AUDIO” is recorded.  
VIDEO MODE AUDIO  
L CH  
R CH  
• This selects whether to record the left channel (“L CH”) or right channel (“R CH”) when  
recording (or dubbing) bilingual sound to DVD-RW/R in Video mode.  
* This does not apply when recording from the DV IN terminal.  
MANUAL REC. MODE  
32 levels  
• If you set by selecting one of the 32 picture quality levels for “MN”, recording will be  
done at that picture quality when “MN” is selected using REC MODE on the remote  
control. For details, see page 40.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
Basic Operation for  
REC. FUNCTION Setting  
This operation is available in both HDD mode  
and DVD mode.  
Example: Setting “EXTERNAL AUDIO” under  
“REC. FUNCTION”  
1 1 Press START MENU to  
display “START MENU” screen.  
2 Press ' /"/\ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 1”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
[
]
START MENU OTHER SETTINGS 1  
25/12 10:28  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK  
INFORMATION  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 2  
2 Press \/| to select “REC.  
FUNCTION”.  
[
]
OTHER SETTING 1 REC. FUNCTION  
25/12 10:28  
REC. FUNCTION  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
AUTO CHAPTER  
EXACT RECORDING  
REC. AUDIO FORMAT  
EXTERNAL AUDIO  
VIDEO MODE AUDIO  
MANUAL REC. MODE  
3 Press '/" to select “EXTERNAL  
AUDIO”, then press SET/ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS 1 REC. FUNCTION  
25/12 10:28  
REC. FUNCTION  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
AUTO CHAPTER  
EXACT RECORDING  
REC. AUDIO FORMAT  
EXTERNAL AUDIO  
VIDEO MODE AUDIO  
MANUAL REC. MODE  
4 Press \ /| to select the option  
you want to set, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS 1 EXTERNAL AUDIO  
25/12 10:28  
SELECT EXTERNAL AUDIO MODE WHEN  
RECORDING.FROM EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT.  
STEREO  
BILINGUAL  
n
RETURN  
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
5 Press EXIT to exit from External  
Audio Setting.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
PASSWORD  
• This sets the password for setting or changing Parental Control.  
PASSWORD  
SETTING  
4 digit number  
DVD PLAY  
SETTING  
PARENTAL CONTROL  
• This lets you set Parental Control depending on disc content.  
• Level 1: For most restricted viewing → Level 8: For adult viewing  
(The smaller the number, the greater the level of restriction.)  
OFF, LEVEL:1-8  
COUNTRY CODE  
• When “PARENTAL CONTROL” is set to “OFF”, DVD discs can be  
played back regardless of the parental level.  
• Parental Control cannot be set if a password has not been set.  
* Refer to the Country  
Code List below.  
DISC LANGUAGE  
SUBTITLE  
AUDIO  
MENU  
• This lets you select the language for subtitle, audio and menu  
displayed on the screen.  
* Refer to the  
Language Code  
List below.  
Country Code List  
USA  
UK  
HOLLAND  
NORWAY  
DENMARK  
FINLAND  
BELGIUM  
HONG KONG  
SINGAPORE  
THAILAND  
MALAYSIA  
INDONESIA  
TAIWAN  
CANADA  
JAPAN  
ITALY  
SPAIN  
PHILIPPINE  
AUSTRALIA  
RUSSIA  
GERMANY  
FRANCE  
SWISS  
SWEDEN  
CHINA  
Language Code List  
AA Afar  
EU Basque  
KK Kazakh  
OM Afan (Oromo)  
OR Oriya  
PA Panjabi  
SW Swahili  
TA Tamil  
TE Telugu  
TG Tajik  
TH Thai  
TI Tigrinya  
TK Turkmen  
AB Abkhazian  
AF Afrikaans  
AM Ameharic  
AR Arabic  
AS Assamese  
AY Aymara  
AZ Azerbaijani  
BA Bashkir  
BE Byelorussian  
BG Bulgarian  
BH Bihari  
BI Bislama  
BN Bengali, Bangla  
BO Tibetan  
BR Breton  
CA Catalan  
CO Corsican  
CS Czech  
FA Persian  
FI Finnish  
FJ Fiji  
FO Faroese  
FR French  
KL Greenlandic  
KM Cambodian  
KN Kannada  
KO Korean  
KS Kashmiri  
KU Kurdish  
KY Kirghiz  
PL Polish  
PS Pashto, Pushto  
PT Portuguese  
QU Quechua  
RM Rhaeto-Romance TL Tagalog  
RN Kirundi  
RO Romanian  
RU Russian  
RW Kinyarwanda  
SA Sanskrit  
SD Sindhi  
SG Sangho  
SH Serbo-Croatian  
SI Singhalese  
SK Slovak  
FY Frisian  
GA Irish  
GD Scots Gaelic  
GL Galician  
GN Guarani  
GU Gujarati  
HA Hausa  
LA Latin  
LN Lingala  
TN Setswana  
TO Tonga  
TR Turkish  
TS Tsonga  
TT Tatar  
TW Twi  
UK Ukrainian  
UR Urdu  
UZ Uzbek  
VI Vietnamese  
VO Volapük  
WO Wolof  
XH Xhosa  
YO Yoruba  
ZH Chinese  
ZU Zulu  
LO Laothian  
LT Lithuanian  
LV Latvian, Lettish  
MG Malagasy  
MI Maori  
MK Macedonian  
ML Malayalam  
MN Mongolian  
MO Moldavian  
MR Marathi  
HI Hindi  
HR Croatian  
HU Hungarian  
HY Armenian  
IA Interlingua  
IE Interlingue  
IK Inupiak  
IN Indonesian  
IS Icelandic  
IT Italian  
IW Hebrew  
JA Japanese  
JI Yiddish  
JW Javanese  
KA Georgian  
SL Slovenian  
SM Samoan  
SN Shona  
CY Welsh  
DA Danish  
DE German  
DZ Bhutani  
EL Greek  
MS Malay  
MT Maltese  
MY Burmese  
NA Nauru  
NE Nepali  
NL Dutch  
SO Somali  
SQ Albanian  
SR Serbian  
SS Siswat  
ST Sesotho  
SU Sundanese  
SV Swedish  
EN English  
EO Esperanto  
ES Spanish  
ET Estonian  
NO Norwegian  
OC Occitan  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
Password Setting  
Basic Operation for  
VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
This operation is available in both HDD mode  
and DVD mode.  
1 Select “PASSWORD SETTING” in  
step 3, then press SET/ENTER.  
2 Press \ /| to select “YES”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press Number buttons to input 4  
digit password, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
4 Press Number buttons to input  
password for confirmation, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
5 Press SET/ENTER at the “OK”  
screen.  
Example: Setting “DVD PLAY SETTING”  
under “VIEW/PLAY SETTING”  
+
VIDEO Plus  
1 1 Press START MENU to  
display “START MENU” screen.  
2 Press ' /"/ \ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 1”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
[
]
START MENU OTHER SETTINGS 1  
25/12 10:28  
NOTE  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
If you forget your password  
• If you forget your password, and you wish  
to return the password to its initial state,  
press ISTOP/LIVE 4 times in a row at the  
Password Setting screen.  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK  
INFORMATION  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 2  
Disc Language Setting  
• You can set subtitle language, audio  
language and menu language.  
2 Press \/| to select “VIEW/PLAY  
SETTING”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS 1 VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
REC. FUNCTION VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
25/12 10:28  
ADJUSTMENT  
1 Select “DISC LANGUAGE” in step 4,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
PASSWORD SETTING  
DVD PLAY SETTING  
2 Press \ /| to select subtitle  
language, then press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press \ /| to select audio lan-  
guage, then press SET/ENTER.  
4 Press \ /| to select menu lan-  
guage, then press SET/ENTER.  
3 Press '/" to select “DVD PLAY  
SETTING”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS 1 VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
REC. FUNCTION VIEW/PLAY SETTING  
25/12 10:28  
ADJUSTMENT  
PASSWORD SETTING  
DVD PLAY SETTING  
4 Press ' /" to select “PAREN-  
TAL CONTROL”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
• The password input screen appears.  
It changes to the following screen  
after you input your password and  
press SET/ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS 1 DVD PLAY SETTING  
25/12 10:28  
PARENTAL CONTROL  
DISC LANGUAGE  
SETS THE PARENTAL CONTROL OF DVD VIDEO  
SET THE PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL  
OFF  
SET THE COUNTRY CODE  
GERMANY  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
5 Press \ /| to select the desired  
parental control level, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
6 Press \ /| to select the country  
code, then press SET/ENTER.  
7 Press EXIT to exit from Parental  
Control Setting screen.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
ADJUSTMENT  
TV MODE  
VIDEO/  
AUDIO SET-  
TING  
• If you switch your TV (i.e. because you have bought a new one) and  
the screen size of the connected TV changes, you will have to change  
the “TV MODE” setting.  
• You can set the screen aspect ratio of the connected TV, and adjust  
video output.  
• Select “TV MODE” from “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING”.  
WIDE 16:9:  
WIDE 16:9  
NORMAL 4:3  
LETTER BOX  
PAN SCAN  
Select this when connecting with a TV with a 16:9  
screen aspect ratio.  
NORMAL 4:3: Select this when connecting with a TV with a 4:3 screen  
aspect ratio.  
LETTER BOX: If you connect with a TV whose screen aspect ratio is  
4:3 and playback a DVD with 16:9 video, the video will  
be played back with black bands at the top and bottom,  
while maintaining the 16:9 ratio.  
PAN SCAN: If you connect with a TV whose screen aspect ratio is  
4:3 and playback a DVD with 16:9 video, the video will  
be played back with the left and right sides of the image  
cut off to display in 4:3 screen aspect ratio.  
(This function works if the disc is labeled for 4:3PS.)  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
• You can set this to enjoy Dolby Digital sound, DTS or MPEG sound  
when connecting with digital input compatible device using Digital  
cable.  
PCM  
BIT STREAM  
PCM:  
This setting is for when you digitally connect with 2ch  
audio device or an MD recorder. This changes Dolby  
Digital sound, DTS or MPEG sound to PCM  
(uncompressed) output which can be played back with  
2ch audio device.  
BIT STREAM: This setting is for when you digitally connect with audio  
device which is compatible with Dolby Digital sound,  
DTS or MPEG sound.  
You can also enjoy DTS audio if you connect with an  
amplifier or other component which is compatible with  
DTS digital surround.  
NOTE  
• When a DTS signal is input, the data is output as a bit  
stream even if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to  
“PCM”.  
DD OUTPUT LEVEL  
NO  
YES  
• This lets you adjust the range between the loudest and softest sound  
(dynamic range), and play back at the average volume. Use this  
when it is hard to hear dialog.  
NO:  
This outputs recorded audio as is.  
YES*:  
This raises the average volume when playing back  
Dolby Digital audio so that the volume sounds the same  
as an audio CD. (If the audio sounds abnormal, set to  
“NO”.)  
* Lower the volume before setting. If you do not do so, the speaker  
may emit a loud sound, or excessive input may be applied to the  
speaker.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
ADJUSTMENT  
DNR (DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION)  
VIDEO/  
AUDIO SET-  
TING  
• This lets you reduce noise for an easier to view picture when noise in  
the played back image is bothering you. It is recommended to set this  
to “ON” when playing back video recorded in long play modes like LP  
mode or EP mode, and to “OFF” when playing back discs with little  
noise (like DVD video).  
ON  
OFF  
OPTION  
SETTING  
HI SP DUB PRIORITY  
• To perform high speed dubbing from the HDD to a DVD in Video  
mode, set this to “YES” before recording to the HDD.  
YES  
NO  
• If you wish to edit in frame units, set this to “NO”. For details of “HIGH  
SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY”, refer to page 48.  
SEAMLESS PLAYBACK  
• This setting is for smoother playback of the transitions between  
scenes when you have edited an original title or play list. (The  
transition point may shift about one second.)  
YES  
NO  
ALTERNATE RECORDING  
• This function is for switching recording to HDD when you originally set  
to record to DVD-RW/R but could not because of the disc situation.  
This function works in the following cases.  
YES  
NO  
*1 When there is not enough disc capacity left in DVD.  
2 When a disc which cannot record is loaded.  
3 When you forget to load a disc.  
4 When a disc is playing within 2 minutes prior to the start of timer  
recording.  
* In case 1, when the remaining capacity of HDD is less than  
that of DVD, the recording will continue on to DVD.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
ADJUSTMENT  
LCD BACKLIGHT REC.  
• This sets whether to turn the LCD backlight on or off during timer  
recording.  
NO:  
OPTION  
SETTING  
NO  
YES  
This sets so that the LCD backlight remains lit, even during timer  
recording.  
YES:  
This lets you turn off the LCD backlight only when the power is off  
(standby state) and timer recording starts. It is convenient to set this,  
for example, when the light disturbs your sleep.  
AUTO POWER OFF  
• This sets the Recorder so that power is automatically shut off if it is in  
stopped state for about 3 hours.  
YES  
NO  
BLUE SCREEN  
• This lets you set so that noise on the TV screen is automatically  
switched to a blue screen if you select a channel whose broadcast is  
finished, or a channel with no broadcast.  
OFF  
ON  
DV SETTING  
• This lets you operate the connected digital camcorder from the  
DV LINK  
Recorder when capturing video into the Recorder via a DV connec-  
OFF  
tion. You can also select the type of audio to be captured from the  
camcorder.  
DV LINK  
OFF:  
Select this when you cannot operate the camcorder properly with  
the On-screen Control Panel.  
ON:  
ON  
DV AUDIO INPUT  
STEREO 1  
STEREO 2  
STEREO 1  
+ STEREO 2  
This lets you operate the camcorder using the On-screen Control  
Panel.  
DV AUDIO INPUT  
STEREO 1*:  
This lets you capture audio you recorded with the camcorder.  
STEREO 2*:  
This lets you capture camcorder’s audio you recorded using after  
recording.  
STEREO 1 + STEREO 2*:  
This lets you simultaneously capture audio from stereo 1 and audio  
from stereo 2.  
* When the connected digital camcorder’s audio output is set to 16  
bit, this setting will be invalid.  
DVD DISC PROTECTION  
• This protects the disc so you do not mistakenly record on it or erase  
its content.  
NOT PROTECT  
PROTECT  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
Basic Operation for  
ADJUSTMENT Setting  
Example: Setting “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING”  
under “ADJUSTMENT”  
1 1 Press START MENU to  
display “START MENU” screen.  
2 Press ' /"/ \ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 1”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
[
]
START MENU OTHER SETTINGS 1  
25/12 10:28  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK  
INFORMATION  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 2  
2 Press \/| to select “ADJUST-  
MENT”.  
OTHER SETTINGS 1 ADJUSTMENT  
REC. FUNCTION VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING  
OPTION SETTING  
[
]
25/12 10:28  
3 Press '/" to select the setting  
you want to set, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS 1 ADJUSTMENT  
REC. FUNCTION VIEW/PLAY SETTING ADJUSTMENT  
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING  
OPTION SETTING  
25/12 10:28  
4 1 Press ' /" to select the item  
you want to select, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
[
]
OTHER SETTINGS 1 VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING  
TV MODE  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT  
25/12 10:28  
SELECT TV MODE  
DD OUTPUT LEVEL  
DNR  
WIDE 16:9  
NORMAL 4:3  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
2 Press \ /| to select the de-  
sired option, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
5 Press EXIT to exit.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
Functions under OTHER SETTINGS 2  
This section explains various settings relating to input/output of video/audio signal, TV channel preset and clock.  
• For details about each setting, see the corresponding pages.  
MODE SETTING s page 95  
MANUAL TUNING s page 97  
CHANNEL SORT s page 97  
CLOCK SETTING s page 98  
POST CODE s page 98  
MODE SETTING  
NICAM  
• This recorder can receive and record NICAM or A2 broadcasts. NICAM broadcasts will  
be received when “AUTO” is selected in the NICAM setting. Depending on the  
received programme, some NICAM or A2 broadcasts may not be in stereo.  
AUTO  
OFF  
L1 OUT  
• This sets the type of video signal output from L1 (TV) according to the specification of  
connected TV.  
Y/C  
RGB  
COMP.  
NOTE  
• To view an RGB output video, press the TV/DVD button on the remote control and  
switch to DVD mode.  
L2 IN  
Y/C  
COMP.  
• This sets the type of video signal input from L2 (DECODER/EXT).  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
About NICAM/A2  
Basic Operation for  
This recorder can receive and record NICAM  
or A2 broadcasts. NICAM broadcasts will be  
received when “AUTO” is selected in the  
NICAM setting. Depending on the received  
programme, some NICAM or A2 broadcasts  
may not be in stereo.  
MODE SETTING  
Example : Setting “NICAM” under “MODE  
SETTING”  
1 Press START MENU to display  
the START MENU screen.  
2 Press '/" /\ /| to select  
“OTHER SETTINGS 2”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
NICAM Broadcast  
+
VIDEO Plus  
The monitor output listed in the table shows  
the audio output mode. The contents of audio  
recording are different between VR mode and  
Video mode. See the tables below for details.  
3 Press '/" to select “MODE  
SETTING”, then press SET/  
ENTER to confirm.  
About audio recording  
RECORDING AUDIO  
EXTERNAL AUDIO  
• The MODE menu is displayed with  
NICAM selected.  
Broadcast  
VR MODE VIDEO MODE  
VIDEO MODE AUDIO  
STEREO  
L
R
L
R
NICAM/A2  
STEREO  
©N I CAM  
L 1 OUT  
L 2 I N  
AUTO  
Y / C  
Y / C  
L
L
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
R
R
L
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
R
L
BILINGUAL  
L
BILINGUAL  
R
NICAM/A2 STEREO  
BILINGUAL  
BILINGUAL  
: SE L ECT  
: ENT ER  
: CHANGE  
: RE T URN  
L
BILINGUAL  
R
R
NICAM/A2 STEREO  
MONO  
MONO MONO  
MONO MONO  
MONO MONO  
MONO MONO  
MONO MONO  
MONO MONO  
4 Press\ /| to select “OFF”.  
BILINGUAL  
L
BILINGUAL  
R
5 Press SET/ENTER to confirm  
and return to the menu screen.  
· When making a PCM recording of bilingual sound, only  
the audio selected in “VIDEO MODE AUDIO” is  
recorded.  
· When recording audio in the PCM format with the  
recording mode set to “FINE” or “MN32”, audio is  
recorded in the same format as recorded to DVD-RW/R  
disc in Video mode.  
6 Press START MENU or EXIT to  
exit to normal screen.  
· When a disc recorded in monaural audio is playback,  
monaural audio is played back even though “STEREO”  
is displayed on the screen.  
About audio selection  
Audio  
Audio Mode* Display of Display of  
Output  
Broadcast  
Displayed  
on screen  
Broadcast  
Audio  
Received Received  
L
R
NICAM  
STEREO  
NICAM  
–
MONO  
L R  
L R  
L
L+R L+R  
STEREO  
NICAM  
STEREO  
L R  
L
R
NICAM  
I/II  
NICAM  
BILINGUAL  
L R  
L
R
NICAM  
I/II  
L
L
L
NICAM  
I/II  
R
R
R
R
NICAM  
MONO  
STEREO  
(Except  
NICAM)  
NICAM  
–
–
MONO  
MONO  
L R  
L R  
L
MONO  
MONO  
L+R  
R
STEREO  
L+R  
L
STEREO L R  
BILINGUAL  
(Except  
NICAM)  
I/II  
I/II  
I/II  
L R  
L
L
R
L
L
R
R
R
R
MONO  
(Except  
NICAM)  
–
–
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
* Audio mode is selected with the AUDIO button on the  
remote control.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
MANUAL TUNING*1  
PRESET  
• This lets you preset the channels into memory. A maximum of 84 channels can be  
preset.  
1 - 84  
CHXX  
CHANNEL  
• For details, see “Channel Setting” on page 28.  
FINE TUNING  
• This lets you obtain sharp colour picture.  
DECODER  
ON  
OFF  
• If there have a separate decoder connected to the L2 terminal of the Recorder, set this  
function to “ON” in order to record the unscrambled signal and/or watch it on your TV.  
SKIP  
ON  
OFF  
• This determines whether the channel can be selected when using CH '/" instead of  
Number buttons.  
1
*
For details, see page 28.  
CHANNEL SORT*2  
MOVE  
• When your Recorder tunes in broadcast channels automatically, it sorts them into a  
standard order using internal information. The “MOVE” function lets you change the  
order of the channel.  
CANCEL  
• This lets you delete a channel from the Recorder memory.  
NAME  
• When your Recorder tunes in broadcast channels automatically, it names them using  
the VPS/PDC information. The “NAME” function lets you change the name of the  
channel.  
2
*
For details, see pages 28, 29.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
CLOCK SETTING*3  
CLOCK  
• The clock will normally be set using the VPS/PDC information when your Recorder  
automatically tunes in the broadcast channels. If for any reason the VPS/PDC signals  
are not present, your Recorder will not be able to set the clock. The “CLOCK” function  
lets you set the clock manually.  
TIME:XX:XX(24H)  
DATE:Day/Month  
YEAR:XX  
ADJUST:  
∗:AUTO/-:OFF  
3
*
For details, see page 27.  
POST CODE*4  
POST CODE  
• This function should allow the Police to identify you as the owner of the Recorder if it is  
stolen. Each time the Recorder is turned on, your postcode will be displayed for 5  
seconds. Your postcode cannot be changed or removed without first entering the  
correct PIN - number.  
0000–9999  
4
*
For details, see page 30.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
Initialization  
Before recording to DVD-RW, initialize the disc in VR mode  
or Video mode.  
Finalization  
Finalization is done so that a recorded DVD-RW/R disc can  
be played back with other recorders.  
You can also initialize the HDD. Initialize the HDD only after  
dubbing important recordings onto DVD-RW/R disc(s).  
INITIALIZE  
DVD VR MODE INIT.  
INITIALIZE  
• When recording with a DVD-RW in VR mode, initialize in VR mode  
before you start recording.  
YES  
NO  
(When you initialize, all of the recorded content of the disc is erased.  
Before initializing, check the content of the disc so that you do not  
erase any content you need.)  
• You cannot initialize if “DVD DISC PROTECTION” is set to  
“PROTECT”. (page 93)  
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.  
YES  
NO  
• When recording with a DVD-RW disc in Video mode, initialize in Video  
mode before you start recording.  
(When you initialize, all of the recorded content of the disc is erased.  
Before initializing, check the content of the disc so that you do not  
erase any content you need.)  
• You cannot erase with DVD-R disc.  
AUTO INITIALIZE  
• This sets the Recorder so it automatically initializes any unused DVD-  
RW discs which are loaded into the Recorder.  
You can initialize in either VR mode or Video mode.  
VR  
VIDEO  
HDD INITIALIZE  
YES  
NO  
• If an HDD error message is displayed, or if you wish to return the HDD  
to the state it was in when the Recorder was purchased, initialize the  
HDD. All recorded video will be erased. (If you use the “ERASE ALL  
TITLES” function to erase the titles, protected titles will remain, but if  
you use the HDD initializing function, all titles will be erased.)  
Dub any important recordings to DVD-RW/R disc(s) before initializing  
the HDD.  
FINALIZE  
DVD FINALIZE  
• Set this when you want to playback a VR mode or Video mode disc  
using another recorder capable of playback.  
DVD  
FINALIZE  
YES  
NO  
If you finalize a recording on DVD-R disc, you will not be able to  
record any more on the disc.  
• Finalization can take anywhere from a few minutes to one hour.  
During finalization, all types of operation are disabled (including  
turning off power and removing the disc).  
• Do not unplug the power cord during finalization. Doing so may make  
the disc unusable.  
UNDO DVD FINALIZE  
YES  
NO  
• This resets a finalized DVD-RW disc so you can record on it again.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function Setting  
4 1 Press \ /| to select “YES”,  
then press SET/ENTER.  
• Initializing (or finalizing) will be  
executed.  
Basic Operation for  
INITIALIZE/FINALIZE  
Example: Setting “DVD VR MODE INIT.” (VR  
INITIALIZE  
25/12 10:28  
mode)  
DVD VR MODE INIT.  
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.  
AUTO INITIALIZE  
INITIALIZING...  
HDD INITIALIZE  
1 1 Press START MENU to  
display “START MENU” screen.  
2 Press ' /"/ \ /| to select  
“INITIALIZE/FINALIZE”, then  
press SET/ENTER.  
+
VIDEO Plus  
[
]
START MENU INITIALIZE/FINALIZE  
25/12 10:28  
EDIT/  
ERASE  
REC LIST  
DUBBING  
INITIALIZE  
25/12 10:28  
TIMER  
PROGRAM/  
CHECK  
INITIALIZE/  
FINALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 1  
DVD VR MODE INIT.  
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.  
AUTO INITIALIZE  
INITIALIZING COMPLETED.  
INITIALIZES HDD/DVD AND FINALIZES DVD  
HDD INITIALIZE  
OTHER  
SETTINGS 2  
INFORMATION  
2 Press '/" to select “INITIAL-  
IZE” or “FINALIZE”, then press  
SET/ENTER.  
OK  
ENTER  
ENTER  
25/12 10:28  
INITIALIZE/FINALIZE  
• Initializing (or finalizing) will be  
completed.  
2 Press SET/ENTER.  
• Screen in step 2 appears.  
REVERTS DISC TO UNUSED STATE  
(ALL STORED DATA ERASED).  
INITIALIZE  
5 Press EXIT to exit from “INITIAL-  
ENABLES PLAYBACK OF RECORDED  
DVD DISC ON OTHER DVD PLAYERS.  
DVD FINALIZE  
IZE/FINALIZE” screen.  
NOTE  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
• Finalization processing will take anywhere  
from a few minutes to about an hour.  
(Processing will take time if there is a lot of  
empty space or if there are many titles on  
the DVD disc.)  
3 Press '/" to select “DVD VR  
MODE INIT.”, then press SET/  
ENTER.  
INITIALIZE  
25/12 10:28  
DVD VR MODE INIT.  
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.  
AUTO INITIALIZE  
AFTER RECORDING, IT IS POSSIBLE TO  
USE A VARIETY OF EDITING FUNCTIONS  
TO CUSTOMIZE YOUR VIDEO.  
HDD INITIALIZE  
INITIALIZE DVD?  
YES  
NO  
n
ENTER  
SELECT  
ENTER  
RETURN  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
The following problems do not always suggest a defect or malfunction of this Recorder.  
Perform the checks listed below before calling service.  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
The Recorder power does not turn on.  
•
•
Is the power cord firmly plugged into the AC outlet?  
If the power cord is plugged into the outlet, unplug it once, wait about one minute, and then plug it in again.  
Then turn power on.  
The Recorder sounds like it is operating, even when power is  
turned off.  
•
This is the sound the Recorder makes during operation like timer recording.  
The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray.  
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).  
Take out the disc and clean it.  
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this Recorder.  
Make sure that the disc is playable.  
No picture.  
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly.  
Make sure that the connected TV or the AV amplifier is set to the correct input.  
Take out the disc and clean it.  
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this Recorder.  
The Recorder does not play a disc.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Take out the disc and clean it.  
Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).  
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this Recorder.  
Remove the dew in the Recorder.  
Check that the disc is recorded in PAL format.  
The Recorder cannot playback video which was not recorded normally.  
Proper playback may be impossible due to the state of the disc recording, a scratched, warped or dirty disc, the  
state of the pick-up, or compatibility issues between this Recorder and the disc being used.  
Settings have disappeared.  
•
If, while its power is on, the Recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) for more than about 1 hour, the  
settings will be lost. Make sure that you turn off the Recorder before unplugging the power cord.  
Screen freezes and operation buttons do not work.  
•
•
•
Press ISTOP/LIVE and restart playback.  
Turn off the power and turn on the power again.  
If power does not go off, press the RESET button inside the front door of the Recorder.(Page 103)  
The remote control does not work.  
No sound or sound is distorted.  
•
•
•
•
Is the Tamper Proof function active?(Page 36)  
Set the remote control and the Recorder to the same remote control code.(Page 21)  
Use the remote control within its operating range.  
Replace the batteries.  
•
•
•
If the volume of TV or amplifier is set to minimum, turn the volume up.  
There is no sound during still mode, slow motion playback, fast forward and fast reverse.  
DVD audio recorded in DTS is only output from the DIGITAL AUDIO Output terminals. Connect a DTS-  
compatible digital amplifier or decoder to the DIGITAL AUDIO Output OPTICAL or COAXIAL terminal on this  
Recorder.  
•
•
•
•
Check that the audio cable is connected correctly.  
Check that the cable plugs are clean.  
Take out the disc and clean it.  
Audio may not be output depending on the audio recording status, such as when audio other than an audio  
signal or non-standard audio is recorded for the audio content of the disc.  
The picture from external input is distorted.  
•
If the signal is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this Recorder. Connect the external equipment directly  
to your TV.  
The screen is stretched vertically or  
horizontally.  
•
•
Set the TV mode according to the TV you are connecting.(Page 91)  
If the above operation does not set the TV mode, set it using the functions of the connected TV.  
A disc recorded using this Recorder cannot be played back  
on another DVD player.  
•
•
•
Check that the disc is finalized when the disc is in video mode.  
Some players will not play even a finalized disc.  
If the disc was recorded in VR mode, it can only be played back with an RW compatible player. (In some  
cases, the disc must be finalized.)  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
The playback screen will be disturbed if DVD video is recorded  
to a VCR, or played back through a VCR.  
•
This Recorder is compatible with the copy guard of analogue copy protect system. Some discs contain a  
copy prohibiting signal. If you try to playback such a disc through a VCR, or record to a VCR and playback,  
copy guard will prevent normal playback.  
TV operates incorrectly.  
Recording stops.  
•
•
Some TVs with wireless remote control capability may operate incorrectly when using the remote control of  
this Recorder. Use such TV away from this Recorder.  
Recording may stop temporarily at parts where recording is impossible (due to scratches or disc fouling,  
etc.). When recording starts again, the starting part will be recorded as another title. If the disc is in a  
condition where recording is impossible, it is ejected.  
•
When the recording is interrupted, you might lose a few minutes of the recorded content immediately before  
the interrupted point.  
You recorded, but nothing was recorded on disc.  
Cannot record, or recording stops while in progress.  
•
•
If you record a channel with no broadcast (i.e. where the broadcast has ended), recording will be done with  
no video. Likewise, if you record a channel with poor reception, recording may be done with no video.  
Clean the disc.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check whether there is enough empty space on the disc being recorded to.  
Check whether the disc is protected.  
Check whether the number of original titles is 199 (for the HDD) or 99 (for a DVD-RW/R).  
Check whether you are trying to record video whose recording is prohibited.  
Check whether there was a power failure while waiting for (or during) timer recording.  
Clean the disc.  
Proper playback may be impossible due to a scratched, warped or dirty disc, the state of the pick-up, or  
compatibility issues between this Recorder and the disc being used.  
When a digital camcorder is connected to the DV IN terminal,  
video from the camcorder does not appear, or there is no  
sound, or the system operates incorrectly.  
•
•
•
•
•
Check connections.  
Turn off the power of both the Recorder and camcorder once, and then turn it on again.  
Reconnect DV cable.  
Try setting “DV LINK” to “OFF” using “DV SETTING” screen.(Page 93)  
Switch input audio using “DV SETTING” screen.(Page 93)  
Cannot operate the digital camcorder connected to the DV IN  
terminal.  
•
•
Set “DV LINK” to “ON” using “DV SETTING” screen. You can operate using the On-screen Control Panel.  
Operation may be impossible, depending on the connected camcorder.  
There is no video and no audio.  
•
•
•
•
Is the power cord unplugged from the AC outlet?  
Is power in the “OFF” state?  
Does the broadcast have no video or audio?  
Has the Recorder been switched to external input?  
There is just audio with no video.  
•
Is the connection cable for video output connected properly?  
Horizontally wide video appears vertically tall, or black bands  
appear at the top and bottom of the screen.  
•
•
Is “TV MODE” set to match the connected TV? (Page 91)  
If you are using a wide TV, is the “TV MODE” set to “WIDE”? (Page 91)  
Square noise (mosaic) appears on the screen.  
•
Pictures in blocks may be conspicuous in scenes with rapid movement due to the characteristics of digital  
image compression technology.  
Video stops.  
•
•
Has the Recorder been subjected to shock or impact? Are you using it at an unstable location? The Recorder  
will stop if it senses shock or vibration.  
The picture may be disturbed in very rare cases due to the characteristics of the HDD. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Left and right channels of audio are reversed, or sound comes  
out of only one side.  
•
Are left and right audio cables connected to the opposite terminal, or is one side disconnected?  
DVD disc does not play back automatically.  
•
•
Has HDD been selected instead of DVD? Playback will start automatically by switching to DVD.  
Have you set a DVD video disc that has an automatic playback function?  
Continued on Next Page |||  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Suggested Solution  
Timer recording was set, but not executed.  
•
•
•
•
Was there a power failure while standing by for timer recording?  
Is the HDD or DVD full? Erase unnecessary titles from the list.  
Were you performing dubbing?  
If you use the Recorder at a location with low temperature, the HDD may enter the preparation state. Set and  
leave power “ON” for a while before timer recording is performed.  
•
Is the power cord unplugged from the AC outlet?  
The timer recorded content stops in the middle of recording.  
The REC LIST (THUMBNAIL or TITLE LIST) is not displayed.  
•
•
•
•
•
Was the power plug unplugged, or was there a power failure, during timer recording?  
Is the HDD or DVD full? Erase unnecessary titles from the list.  
Recording will stop if a programme whose recording is forbidden begins in the middle of recording.  
Clean the disc.  
If there is a power failure or other power problem during recording to DVD-RW/R, recording will stop in the  
middle. If there is a power failure or other power problem during recording to HDD, that program will be lost.  
•
•
The REC LIST cannot be displayed during Time Shift Viewing or Chasing Playback. Press the ISTOP/  
LIVE button, and return to live viewing.  
If you use the Recorder at a location with low temperature, the HDD may enter the preparation state. Please  
wait a while.  
•
•
There may be a problem with the HDD. Contact the nearest service centre approved by Sharp.  
When a CD is recorded to MD using digital connection, the CD  
and MD do not have the same track numbers.  
If the interval between CD tracks is short, the track numbers on the recorded MD may differ from the CD.  
The Recorder makes a sound even when there is no operation.  
•
•
•
If you do not operate the Recorder for a certain time while power is ON, you will hear the sound of the HDD  
operating. This is not a malfunction.  
The Recorder heats up during use.  
When using this Recorder, the console cabinet may heat up, depending on the use environment. This is not a  
malfunction.  
The Recorder makes a snapping sound when starting  
recording, playback or loading a disc.  
The Recorder may sometimes make a snapping sound when starting recording or playback if you have not  
operated it for a while or when loading a disc. This is the sound of the Recorder operating, and is not a  
malfunction.  
A blinking “----” appears on the front display panel.  
•
The clock has not been set. Set the clock.  
NOTE  
• If this Recorder receives strong interference from strong external noise such as excessive static electricity, malfunction of  
power supply voltage caused by lightning during Recorder use or a wrong operation is sent to the Recorder, errors like the  
Recorder not accepting an operation may occur.  
• Press RESET with a toothpick or other narrow rod-like object (nonmetal) when the Recorder does not operate properly  
even after the power has been turned off and then back on again.  
• Since the clock, channel, timer recording programmes and other data in memory are also reset when RESET has been  
pressed, they must be set again.  
• When the problem persists even after pressing RESET, unplug the power  
cord and plug it again. If this does not solve the problem, contact the  
nearest service centre approved by Sharp.  
RESET button  
The following conditions do not always denote trouble. Therefore, perform the checks described below before calling for  
service. If the problem cannot be corrected by the use of this guide, remove the main plugs from the wall socket, and  
contact the dealer or supplier from whom the unit was purchased in order to obtain service. Where this is not possible  
please visit our web-site www.sharp.co.uk/customersupport.  
Customers without Internet access may telephone 08705 274277 during office hours (or (01) 6760648 if telephoning from  
Ireland),  
Certain replacement parts and accessories may be obtained from our main parts distributor, who can be contacted on the  
following numbers:  
WILLOW VALE ELECTRONICS LTD.:  
0121 766 5414  
In the unlikely event of this equipment requiring repair during the guarantee period, you will need to provide proof of the  
date of purchase to the repairing company. Please keep your invoice or receipt, which is supplied at the time of purchase.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On-screen Error Messages  
Messages Relating to DVD Discs and the HDD  
• The following messages appear on the TV screen in case the disc you tried to playback is not appropriate or  
the operation is not correct.  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
CANNOT PLAY BACK THIS DISC.  
• The disc cannot be played back with  
this Recorder.  
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.  
THIS IS A NON-STANDARD DISC.  
• If you load a disc which cannot be  
played with this Recorder (i.e. a  
scratched disc), or if you load a disc  
upside down, this message will  
appear, and the disc tray will  
automatically pop out.  
REGION CODE OF DISC IS WRONG.  
DISC IS NOT INSERTED.  
• Occurs if you load a DVD disc whose  
region number is not “ALL” or whose  
region number does not contain “2”.  
• Occurs if no disc is loaded in the disc  
tray.  
CANNOT OPERATE THIS FUNCTION.  
DISC IS PROTECTED.  
• Occurs if operation is incorrect.  
• Cancel disc protection, or reload a  
recordable disc.  
• Occurs if you attempt to record or edit  
a disc for which disc protection is set.  
• Occurs if you attempt DV input of  
video which cannot be recorded, and  
attempt to record to a DVD.  
COULD NOT REPAIR THE DISC.  
COULD NOT FINALIZE.  
• If there is a power failure during DVD  
recording, the system automatically  
tries to recover data after power is  
restored. This error occurs if such  
recovery is impossible.  
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.  
• Cannot record.  
• Occurs if the disc is scratched or  
dirty, etc.  
THIS VIDEO IS COPY PROTECTED.  
RECORDING IS NOT POSSIBLE.  
• Occurs if video with a copy guard  
signal is input.  
• Erase unnecessary titles.  
• Either erase unnecessary chapters, or  
combine chapters.  
CANNOT RECORD MORE.  
• Occurs if a title or chapter mark  
exceeds the recordable upper limit.  
• Number of titles: HDD 199/DVD 99.  
Number of chapters: HDD 999/  
DVD 999  
• Reload an appropriate recording  
disc.  
CANNOT RECORD ON THIS DISC.  
•
Occurs if you load a disc which cannot  
be recorded to with this Recorder, or a  
disc which is scratched or dirty.  
• Load a tape into the digital  
camcorder.  
NO TAPE INSERTED IN DV  
CAMCORDER.  
•
Occurs if you attempt operation when a  
tape has not been loaded in the digital  
camcorder linked via DV connection.  
• Check the power of digital camcorder  
or cable connection.  
CONNECTING TO DV CAMCORDER.  
• Occurs if the digital camcorder power  
goes off or the cable is pulled out  
while connecting to DV.  
• System is performing reconnection  
processing. Wait about 30 seconds.  
• Occurs if connection with the digital  
camcorder is broken.  
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.  
COULD NOT INITIALIZE.  
• Occurs if the disc is scratched or  
dirty, etc.  
• Load a disc with empty space.  
• Erase unnecessary titles.  
DISC IS FULL.  
CANNOT RECORD OR STORE.  
• Occurs if there is no empty space in  
the disc.  
• Load a CPRM compatible disc (DVD-  
RW Ver. 1.1 or higher) initialized in VR  
mode.  
THIS VIDEO CANNOT BE RECORDED  
TO THIS DISC.  
• Occurs if you try to record a “Copy  
Once” broadcast onto a disc which is  
not compatible with CPRM.  
• Connect a digital camcorder, and  
reset again to DV input.  
CAN’T DETECT CAMCORDER.  
• Occurs if you set to DV input without  
connecting a digital camcorder.  
• Occurs if multiple digital camcorders  
are connected.  
• Set the clock and perform timer  
programming again.  
SET THE DATE AND TIME.  
• Occurs if timer programming is done  
when the Recorder clock has not  
been set.  
Continued on Next Page |||  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104  
On-screen Error Messages  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
RECORDING WAS STOPPED DUE TO  
FULL DISC.  
• Occurs when empty space in the  
disc runs out.  
REPAIRING THE DISC.  
• Occurs when recording stops  
before disc information has been  
correctly written onto a DVD, due to  
a problem like a power failure.  
• Wait until DVD disc recovery is  
finished.  
THIS IS A NON-STANDARD DISC.  
REMOVE IT.  
• Occurs if the loaded disc cannot be  
recorded to or played because it is  
a non-standard or scratched, etc.  
• Remove the disc.  
THIS VIDEO CANNOT BE RECORDED • Occurs if you try to record “Copy  
• Record on CPRM compatible DVD-  
RW disc in VR mode.  
TO THIS DISC.  
Once” video onto DVD-R or non-  
CPRM compatible DVD-RW.  
TIMER RECORDING COULD NOT  
START.  
LIVE BROADCAST RECORDING  
PROHIBITED.  
RECORDING STOPPED.  
• Occurs if a programme begins  
during recording, and recording of  
the broadcast itself is forbidden due  
to copyright protection.  
THIS VIDEO IS COPY PROTECTED.  
RECORDING IS NOT POSSIBLE.  
• Occurs if you attempt to record a  
programme, and recording of the  
broadcast itself is forbidden due to  
copyright protection.  
CANNOT OPERATE DUE TO HDD  
ERROR.  
CAN VIEW LIVE BROADCASTS ONLY.  
CONTACT THE NEAREST SERVICE  
CENTRE APPROVED BY SHARP.  
• Occurs when there is a problem  
with the HDD, and when you  
perform an operation which  
requires HDD operation, like special  
playback or recording.  
• Initialize the HDD once. If initializa-  
tion does not solve the problem,  
please contact the nearest service  
centre approved by Sharp as soon  
as possible.  
SYSTEM ERROR.  
POWER IS OFF.  
• If a problem occurs with the HDD  
while power is “ON”, power is shut  
off automatically.  
CHECKING HARD DISC.  
CAN ONLY VIEW LIVE BROADCAST  
UNTIL CONFIRMATION IS OVER.  
• Occurs if there is a power failure, or  
the power cord is unplugged and  
plugged in again while power is  
“ON”.  
• It may take 1-2 minutes to check the  
HDD. During this time, you can only  
watch live broadcasts. Wait a while  
until the check is over.  
THIS PROGRAM COPY IS PRO-  
TECTED.  
CANNOT VIEW TIME SHIFT.  
• Occurs if time shift viewing is  
impossible because recording of  
the broadcast itself is forbidden by  
copyright protection.  
• You can only view live broadcasts.  
Messages during Special Playback  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
CANNOT OPERATE DUE TO THE  
CONDITION OF HARD DISC.  
• Occurs if you perform operation like  
special playback when there is  
problem with the HDD.  
• The HDD must be repaired, so  
contact the nearest service centre  
approved by Sharp as soon as  
possible.  
HARD DISC IS NOT READY YET.  
CANNOT OPERATE.  
• Occurs if you perform operation  
requiring operation of the HDD (like  
special playback or recording)  
during HDD preparation.  
• You can only view live broadcasts  
until preparation is finished. Wait a  
while until operation is enabled. (If  
you use the Recorder at a cold  
location and the HDD temperature  
is low, HDD preparation may take  
some time.)  
Messages during Dubbing  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
CANNOT SELECT MORE.  
• Occurs if you attempt to select 6  
titles (chapters) at the screen for  
selecting titles or chapters to be  
dubbed.  
• Dub 5 titles (or chapters) at a time.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
On-screen Error Messages  
Messages during Dubbing  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
CANNOT HIGH SPEED DUB THIS  
TITLE.  
• Occurs if you attempt high-speed  
dubbing onto DVD in Video mode of  
a title for which “High Speed  
Dubbing Priority” has not been set,  
or if you attempt high speed  
dubbing of a title edited in frame  
units on the HDD.  
• Perform “Rate Conversion Dub-  
bing”.  
TITLE PROTECTION IS SET.  
CANCEL TITLE PROTECTION  
BEFORE DUBBING.  
• Occurs when you attempt to dub a  
title containing a “Copy Once” part  
for which title protection has been  
set.  
• If a title contains a “Copy Once”  
part, you can only move the  
original. If title protection is set for a  
title, you cannot move it, so perform  
dubbing (movement) after cancel-  
ling title protection.  
CANNOT DUB TO DISC DUE TO  
COPY PROTECTED PROGRAM.  
• Occurs if you attempt to dub a title  
containing a “Copy Once” part to  
DVD-R or a non-CPRM compatible  
DVD-RW.  
• Dub in VR mode to a CPRM-  
compatible DVD-RW.  
CANNOT DUB TO THE DISC.  
• Occurs if an unrecordable disc is  
loaded (i.e. when the maximum  
number of titles or chapters is  
exceeded, when the disc is  
protected, when the disc is  
scratched or dirty, or when the disc  
is a ROM disc).  
• Replace with a recordable disc.  
CANNOT DUB FROM THE DISC.  
• Occurs when a disc other than a  
DVD-RW/R is loaded.  
• Dub from a DVD-RW/R disc.  
COPY PROTECTED PROGRAM WILL  
BE MOVED.  
• Occurs if you attempt to dub a title  
containing a “Copy Once” part.  
• Be careful because the dubbing  
source video is erased after  
dubbing.  
Messages during Editing  
Error message  
Possible Error  
Suggested Solution  
CANNOT SELECT MORE.  
• Occurs if you attempt to select  
more than 20 titles (chapters) when  
you perform Erase Selected Title.  
• Erase a maximum of 20 titles  
(chapters) at a time.  
CANNOT SET THIS POSITION.  
• Occurs if you attempt to designate  
a range shorter than 3 seconds and  
edit.  
• Designate a range of 3 seconds or  
more. (If you designate a range of 3  
seconds or more, you can  
designate in frame units.)  
CHAPTER IS FULL. CANNOT  
OPERATE THIS FUNCTION.  
• Occurs if the editing result exceeds  
the upper limit of total number of  
chapters (999).  
• Edit after erasing unnecessary  
chapter marks by combining  
chapters.  
CANNOT COMBINE THESE CHAP-  
TERS.  
• Occurs if you attempt to combine  
chapters which cannot be com-  
bined. (Chapters created when you  
erase a scene or chapter in a single  
title cannot be erased).  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Alternate  
Recording  
If you set to Exact Recording but the timer recording programme will not fit into a single  
DVD-RW/R, the Recorder will automatically perform Alternate Recording to HDD.  
The Recorder will also perform Alternate Recording to HDD if you forget to load a DVD-  
RW/R.  
Angle  
Recorded onto some DVD discs are scenes which have been simultaneously shot from  
a number of different angles (the same scene is shot from the front, from the left side,  
from the right side, etc.). With such discs, you can select the angle on Function Control  
Screen to view the scene from different angles.  
Chapter  
Number  
These numbers are recorded on DVD discs. A title is subdivided into many sections,  
each of which is numbered, and specific parts of video presentations can be searched  
quickly using these numbers.  
Chasing Play- This function lets you playback and view a programme while it is being recorded onto  
back  
HDD.  
Copy Guard  
This function prevents copying. You cannot record software or broadcast programmes  
marked by the copyright holder with a signal which limits copying.  
Digital Gamma Corrects for gradations in dark areas of images to make images clearer.  
Digital Super  
Picture  
Enhances the fine detail of the image and outlines of the objects it contains.  
Disc Menu  
This lets you select things like the subtitle language or overdub audio using a menu  
stored on the DVD video disc.  
Dolby Digital  
A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc. that gives movie theatre ambi-  
ence to audio output when the product is connected to a Dolby Digital processor or  
amplifier.  
Dolby Digital  
Output Level  
Setting that increases the average volume of Dolby Digital audio when playing a DVD.  
Dolby Virtual  
Surround  
This lets you enjoy Surround audio via analogue connection with a stereo (2ch) TV or  
audio equipment.  
DTS  
This is a digital sound system developed by Digital Theater Systems for use in cinemas.  
This system uses 6 audio channels and provides accurate sound field positioning and  
realistic acoustics. (By connecting a DTS Digital Surround decoder, you can also listen  
to DTS Digital Surround sound.)  
Exact Dubbing This function is used when dubbing from HDD to DVD. It automatically selects the  
recording mode according to the recording time of the title so that the recording will fit  
into a single disc.  
Exact Record- This function automatically changes the recording mode to prevent recordings from  
ing  
running out before they are finished due to a lack of available DVD disc space by  
comparing the available disc space and the time required for the timer recording.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Finalization  
This is done to enable playback of discs (Video mode) recorded with this Recorder  
using other DVD-RW and DVD-R compatible DVD players. (We do not guarantee that  
playback will be possible with all DVD players.)  
The DVD players which can play back VR mode discs are those with an “ ” indica-  
tion.  
High Speed  
This function lets you perform high speed dubbing to a DVD even in Video mode after  
Dubbing Prior- recording, by setting High Speed Dubbing Priority to “YES” when recording to HDD.  
ity  
Initialization  
This allows you to use the HDD or a DVD-RW disc in this Recorder. If you initialize a  
disc, all of the programmes recorded on it are erased.  
Letter Box  
Screen size that cuts off the top and bottom of the image to allow playing of wide-  
screen (16:9) software on a connected 4:3 TV.  
4:3 LB  
Linear PCM  
Sound  
Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio CDs.  
The sound on Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with 16 bits. (On DVD discs, sound is  
recorded at between 48 kHz with 16 bits and 96 kHz with 24 bits.)  
MP3  
One type of audio compression that uses MPEG1. This format compresses sound to  
about 1/10, without impairing the original sound quality.  
Multi Angle  
This is a feature of DVD video discs. In some discs, the same picture is shot from  
different angles, and these are stored in a single disc so you can enjoy playback from  
different angles. (This function can be enjoyed if the disc is recorded with multiple  
angles.)  
Multi Audio  
This is a feature of DVD video discs. This function makes it possible to record multiple  
different audio tracks for the same video, so you can enhance your enjoyment by  
switching audio. (You can enjoy this function with discs recorded with multiple audio  
tracks.)  
Original  
A video (title) recorded from a TV broadcast or external input is called an “Original”.  
Pan Scan  
Screen size that cuts off the sides of the image to allow playing of wide-screen (16:9)  
software on a connected 4:3 TV.  
4:3 PS  
Parental Con- In some digital broadcasts and DVD video discs, a control level for disc viewing is set  
trol  
depending on the age of the viewer. With this Recorder, you can set the control level for  
viewing such broadcasts and discs.  
Play List  
A set of titles created by copying just the needed scenes from original titles is called a  
“Play List”. (The original titles remain as are.)  
Playback  
This information is recorded on video CDs (version 2.0). This allows you to actively  
Control (PBC) select the sections to be viewed or listened to, using a menu displayed on the TV.  
Rate Conver-  
sion Dubbing  
This function is used to select the picture quality of dubbed titles at the time of dubbing.  
This is a list screen which lets you check the recorded programmes (titles) in list form.  
You can select either Thumbnail or Title List as the REC LIST.  
REC LIST  
Number identifying a geographic region of compatibility for a DVD.  
Region  
Number  
Continued on Next Page |||  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Remote Con-  
trol Code  
This is the type of the remote control signal for operating the recorder. There are two  
types of remote control signal: “Remote Control No. 1” (RC-1) and “Remote Control No.  
2” (RC-2).  
Resume Play- If you stop playback while it is in progress, the Recorder stores the stop position in  
memory, and this function lets you playback from that stopping point.  
back  
Simultaneous This function lets you play back and view already recorded programmes while you are  
Recording/  
Playback  
recording. (However, you cannot play back from a DVD while recording to the DVD.)  
Skip  
This returns to the start of the chapter (or track) being played, or skips to the next  
chapter.(or track)  
Subtitles  
Time Number  
Time Shift  
These are the printed lines appearing at the bottom of the screen which translate or  
transcribe the dialog. They are recorded on DVD discs.  
This indicates the play time which has elapsed from the start of a disc or a title. It can  
be used to find a specific scene quickly. (It may not work with some discs.)  
This Recorder is designed so you can automatically record the programme being  
viewed to the HDD by pressing the TIME SHIFT button. The automatically recorded  
programme can be viewed using other types of playback.  
Title Menu  
In a DVD video disc, this is the menu for selecting things like the chapter to be played  
back and the subtitle language. In some DVD video discs, the title menu may be called  
the “Top Menu”.  
Title Number  
These numbers are recorded on DVD discs. When a disc contains two or more movies,  
these movies are numbered as title 1, title 2, etc.  
Track Number These numbers are assigned to the tracks which are recorded on video CDs and Audio  
CDs. They enable specific tracks to be located quickly.  
VBR Control  
VBR is the abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate control. This feature performs control by  
varying the bit rate (the amount of code transferred in a fixed period of time) by assign-  
ing a larger amount of code to complex video images such as sections containing rapid  
movement or sections containing sudden changes in colour, and assigning a smaller  
amount of code in the opposite cases.  
Video Mode  
VR Mode  
This is a recording format for making DVD-RW/R discs playable with other commercially  
available DVD players. (We do not guarantee that playback will be possible with all DVD  
players.)  
This recording format is the basic DVD-RW recording format, and lets you enjoy the  
various editing functions available with this Recorder.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
General  
Timer  
HDD capacity: ................................ 120 GB (DV-HR350H),  
80 GB (DV-HR300H)  
Power supply: ................................. AC 220-240 V, 50 Hz  
Power consumption  
Programmes: .................................. 16 programmes/1 year  
Clock: .............................................. Quartz lock  
(24-hour digital display)  
Memory backup: ............................. Approx. 1 hour  
(Normal):..................................... 36 W  
Power consumption  
(Standby): ................................... 1 W (While the Front Panel  
Display is off)  
Input/Output  
VHF/UHF antenna input/  
output terminal:........................... 75Ω (F-shape connector)  
Video input: ..................................... LINE 1, LINE 2 (rear), 3 (front)  
Input level: ............................... 1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
SCARTs: ................................... 21 pin  
Jack: ........................................ RCA-pin jack  
Video output:  
Output level: ............................ 1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
SCARTs: ................................... 21 pin  
Jack: ........................................ RCA-pin jack  
S-Video input: ................................. LINE 1, LINE 2 (rear), 3 (front)  
Y-Input level: ............................ 1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
C-Input level: ........................... 0.3 Vp-p (75Ω)  
SCARTs: ................................... 21 pin  
Jack: ........................................ 4 pin mini DIN  
S-Video output:  
Dimensions: .................................... Approx. 430 mm × 59 mm × 323  
mm (W × H × D)  
Approx. 1615/16" × 221/64" × 1223/32"  
Weight: ............................................ Approx. 5.1 kg (11.3 lbs)  
Operating temperature ................... 5°C to 35°C  
Storage temperature: ...................... –20°C to 55°C  
Operating humidity: ........................ 10% to 80% (no condensation)  
TV systems: ..................................... PAL system, 625 lines, 50 fields  
Recording  
Recordable disc media: ................. DVD-RW, DVD-R  
Recording system (HDD): ............... Video: MPEG  
Audio: MPEG (2ch)/Linear PCM  
(FINE/MN32 mode only)  
Recording system (DVD-RW/R): ..... Video: DVD-Video Recording  
(VR mode)  
Y-Output level: ......................... 1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
C-Output level: ........................ 0.3 Vp-p (75Ω)  
SCART (only LINE 1): .............. 21 pin  
Jack: ........................................ 4 pin mini DIN  
Component video output:  
DVD-VIDEO (Video mode)  
Audio: MPEG (2ch)/Linear PCM  
(FINE/MN32 mode only)  
Recording time (Hard disc): ........... FINE (High picture quality):  
Approx. 30 hours (DV-HR350H)  
Approx. 20 hours (DV-HR300H)  
SP (Standard):  
Output level: ............................ Y: 1 Vp-p (75Ω)  
CB, CR: 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)  
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack  
Audio input:..................................... Input 1, 2 (rear), 3 (front) L/R  
Input level: ............................... 2 V rms (Input impedance: more  
than 22 kΩ)  
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack  
Audio output: .................................. L/R  
Output level: ............................ 2 V rms (Output impedance:  
less than 1.5 kΩ)  
Approx. 50 hours (DV-HR350H)  
Approx. 33 hours (DV-HR300H)  
LP (2X):  
Approx. 100 hours (DV-HR350H)  
Approx. 67 hours (DV-HR300H)  
EP (3X):  
Approx. 150 hours (DV-HR350H)  
Approx. 100 hours (DV-HR300H)  
MN (Manual): 32 levels between  
FINE and EP  
Jacks: ...................................... RCA jack  
Digital audio optical output:  
Terminal: .................................. Square Optical terminal  
Digital audio coaxial output:  
(However, the maximum  
continuous recording time is 12  
hours.)  
Jack: ........................................ RCA jack  
DV input:  
Terminal: .................................. 4 pin (i.LINK/IEEE 1394  
standard)  
Recording time  
(With 4.7GB DVD-RW/R): ........... FINE (High picture quality):  
Approx. 1 hour  
LASER Specification  
Wave length: ................................... DVD: 658 nm  
CD: 784 nm  
Laser power: ................................... DVD: 100 mW  
CD: 225 mW  
SP (Standard): Approx. 2 hours  
LP (2X): Approx. 4 hours  
EP (3X): Approx. 6 hours  
MN (Manual): 32 levels between  
FINE and EP  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Playback  
Playable discs:................................ DVD Video, DVD-RW/R,  
DVD+RW/R, Audio CD (CD-DA),  
Video CD, CD-RW/R (CD-DA,  
Video CD format, MP3 file  
format)  
Tuner  
Channel coverage: ......................... UHF E21-E69  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TERMS OF GUARANTEE  
Sharp Electronics (UK) Ltd. (“Sharp”) guarantees to provide for the repair, or at its option the  
replacement, of this product subject to the conditions listed below:-  
1. This guarantee shall only apply to faults which are due to inferior workmanship or materials.It does  
not cover faults or damage caused by accident, misuse, fair wear and tear, neglect, tampering  
with the product, or repair other than by a Service Facility appointed by Sharp.  
2. As this product is intended for private domestic use only, the guarantee will not apply if the product  
is used in the course of a business, trade or profession.  
3. To benefit from this guarantee, any fault which occurs must be notified to Sharp, or its appointed  
Service Facility within one year from the date this product was purchased.Proof of purchase must  
be provided.  
4. The guarantee does not cover carriage costs.  
5. In the unlikely event of this product requiring repair, please contact the supplier from whom it was  
purchased.Where this is not possible, please contact the Sharp Customer Information Centre on  
the telephone number given below.  
6. No person has any authority to vary the terms or conditions of this guarantee.  
7. This guarantee is offered as an additional benefit to your statutory rights, and does not affect these  
rights in any way.  
If you have any difficulty operating this product, or would like information on other Sharp products,  
please telephone the Sharp Customer Information Centre on the number given below.  
Sharp Customer Information Centre - Telephone 08705 274277  
(or (01) 676 0648 if telephoning from Ireland)  
0201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHARP CORPORATION  
SHARP ELECTRONICS (U.K.) LTD.  
Sharp House, Thorp Road, Newton Heath  
Manchester M40 5BE  
Printed in Malaysia  
TINS-B101WJN1  
04P05-MSK  
Printed on 100% post-consumer recycled paper.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sharp PDAs Smartphones OZ 770 User Manual
Sony Laptop PCG F104K User Manual
Sony Stereo Receiver STRDG810 User Manual
Sony Universal Remote RM LJ304 User Manual
Southbend Oven SSB 32 User Manual
Stiga Brush Cutter SB 425 HD User Manual
Sunbeam Fryer PU5300 User Manual
Sunrise Medical Mobility Aid Quickie P120 User Manual
Symphonic VCR F1810M User Manual
Tannoy Portable Speaker DC8i User Manual